BP HBK 76100 00001 PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 424
At a glance
Powered by AI
The key takeaways are that this handbook provides guidance on rigging and lifting practices for Bruce Power staff and contractors. It outlines guidelines and practices to be followed.

The purpose of this handbook is to provide guidance to all potential users on rigging and lifting practices that are a big part of maintenance and operations activities at Bruce Power.

The main sections covered in the handbook include personnel requirements, rigging and lifting practices, craning considerations, wire rope, fibre rope, chain, fittings and hardware, slings, rigging tools and devices, anchor points and non-standard lifting points, travelling overhead bridge and gantry cranes, and road mobile, rough terrain and crawler cranes.

Rigging and Lifting

Handbook

For Bruce site use only


Notice

Neither Bruce Power, Ontario Power Generation Inc., nor

any person acting on their behalf, makes any representation

or warranty, express or implied, with respect to the use of

any information, data, procedures, practices or

recommendations contained in this handbook; or assumes

any liabilities with respect to the use of, or for damages

resulting from the use of, any such information, data,

procedures or recommendations.

This handbook is FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY, to be used

only by Bruce Power staff and contractors and is not to be

released or disclosed to external parties without the express

written permission of Bruce Power. Contractors using this

handbook while performing activities for Bruce Power must

return the book to their contract supervisor upon exit.


Table of Contents

1.0 Introduction

2.0 Personnel Requirements

3.0 Rigging and Lifting Practices

4.0 General Craning Considerations

5.0 Wire Rope

6.0 Fibre Rope

7.0 Chain

8.0 Fittings and Hardware

9.0 Slings

10.0 Rigging Tools and Devices

11.0 Anchor Points and Non-Standard Lifting

Points

12.0 Travelling Overhead Bridge and Gantry

Cranes

13.0 Road Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler

Cranes

14.0 Critical Hoisting Operations


1.0 Introduction

1.1 Forward

1.2 Acknowledgement

1.3 Scope

1.4 References

1.5 Definitions

1.6 Acronyms

Introduction
1

1.0 Lifting and Rigging Handbook

1.1 Foreword

Rigging and Lifting are a big part of maintenance and

operations activities at Bruce Power. This handbook is

intended to provide guidance to all potential users.

This revision was printed in 2009, and includes extensive

revisions throughout the document.

This handbook must remain relevant. It shall be reviewed

for content every five years or sooner, if necessary due to

changes in legislation. Any requests for revision should be

referred to the Rigging and Lifting Program Owner in

Maintenance Programs.

Technical inquiries or concerns regarding the Rigging and

Lifting Handbook should be directed to the Bruce Power

System Engineer, Cranes and Hoists.

This handbook is recommended to supervisors and workers

directly engaged in rigging and lifting. It outlines guidelines

and practices.

2
Introduction

1.2 Acknowledgement

Thanks are due to a number of individuals and organizations

who have provided permission to use material from their

publications in this handbook. Of special note are the

Construction Safety Association of Ontario, EPRI (Electrical

Power Research Institute), Ontario Power Generation,

Unirope, The Crosby Group and Mike Riggs, author of The

Complete Riggers Reference Handbook (www.riggsafe.com).

Revised by: _________________________________

Rebecca Ellis, FLM, Maintenance Programs

Verified by: _____________________________________

Fred Wolsey, Senior Technical Engineer

Mechanical Equipment

Approved by: ____________________________________

David Khan, VP, Nuclear Operations Support

Introduction
3

1.3 Scope

The Occupational Health and Safety Act and Selected

Regulations for Construction Projects and Industrial

Establishments provide the minimum standards that concern

rigging and hoisting operations.

It must be noted that Rigging and Lifting activities are

traditionally viewed by the Ministry of Labour (MOL) as

construction type activities. This in turn means MOL

usually applies the most stringent standards available when

interpreting the Act and Regulations.

Therefore, it is important that all workers be familiar with

those regulations that apply to the work being done, which

may take precedence over this handbook.

The following points are set within this frame of reference:

a This handbook is issued for the guidance of workers

on the Bruce Power site involved in the use of tools

and equipment for routine rigging and craning work.

b The handbook is not a design guide. It is intended for

the use of riggers, crane operators and supervisors on

the job. The design of special systems and engineered

lifts should be referred to management.

c Notwithstanding this handbook’s contents, work

must comply with the most recent revisions to the

Occupational Health and Safety Act (OHSA) and

Regulations for Construction Projects, Regulations

for Industrial Establishments, the Trades

Qualification and Apprenticeship Act, Reg. 1060

(Hoisting Engineers), other applicable legislation, and

the recommendations of the manufacturers of the

equipment. Bruce Power Corporate Safety Rules and

any special instructions or procedures may also take

precedence over this book.


4
Introduction

d This handbook is issued for the guidance of workers

on the Bruce Power site involved in the use of tools

and equipment for routine rigging and lifting work.

e Rigging tools and lifting equipment are used

throughout Bruce Power in the construction,

operation, and maintenance of its facilities. Safety

in the use of this equipment begins with scheduled

inspection and maintenance, knowledge of

established practices, selection of the proper

equipment, and common sense in application.

f In this document, the word “shall” indicates

mandatory actions, the word “should” indicates a

recommended action, in line with management best

practices, and the word “may” indicates

compliance is discretionary.

1.4 References

Where information is not found in this document, more

detail can be found in the following publications, amongst

others:

Caution

Ontario Hydro Documents, such as the Code of Good

Practice, and the 1997 Standard for Inspection of Lifting

Devices, as well as previous versions of this book are

considered to be out-of-date, and should not be used.

A Bruce Power Internal Documents

• Bruce Power Safety Rules

• BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment

• BP-PROC-00586, Control of Lifting Activities

• BP-PROC-00544, Material Handling


Introduction
5

B Regulatory Documents

• Trades Qualification and Apprenticeship Act R.R.O.

1990, Regulation 1060 Hoisting Engineer

• Trades Qualification and Apprenticeship Act R.R.O.

1990, Regulation 1055, General

• OHSA and Regulations for Construction Projects (O.

Reg. 213/91), Sections 1, 103, 104, - 106, 150-156,

168-179, 186, 187, and as amended

• OHSA and Regulations for Industrial Establishments

(O. Reg. 851/90), Sections 1, 7, 45, 51, 52, 53, 56,

57, 59, 60, 61 and as amended

C Industry Standards

• Construction Safety Association of Ontario Rigging

Manual (1996)

• Construction Safety Association of Ontario: Mobile

Crane Handbook (2001)

• Operating Engineers Training Institute of Ontario

(OETIO), Mobile Lifting Today, 1988

• CSA B167-96, Safety Standard For Maintenance and

Inspection Of Overhead Cranes, Gantry Cranes,

Monorails, Hoists, and Trolleys

• CSA G4-00 Steel Wire Rope for General Purpose and

for Mine Hoisting and Mine Haulage

• CAN/CSA-Z150-98, Safety Code for Mobile Cranes

• CAN/CSA-Z259.10-M90, Full Body Harness

(Reaffirmed 1998 Without Change)

• CAN/CSA-Z259.1-95, Safety Belts and Lanyards

• ASME B18.15-1985, Forged Eyebolts

• ASME B18.15M-1998, Metric Lifting Eyes

• ASME B.30.1-1998, Jacks

• ASME B30.2-2001, Overhead and Gantry Cranes


6
Introduction

• ASME B30.5-2000, Mobile and Locomotive Cranes

• ASME B30.7, Base Mounted Drum Hoists

• ASME B30.9-2003, Slings

• ASME B30.10-1999 Hooks

• ASME B30.11-1998, Monorails and Underhung

Cranes

• ASME B30.16-2003, Overhead Hoists (Underhung)

• ASME B30.17-2003 Overhead and Gantry Cranes

(Top Running Bridge, Single Girder, Underhung

Hoist)

• ASME B30.20-2003, Below the Hook Lifting Devices

• ASME B30.21-1999, Manually Lever Operated Hoist

• ASME B30.26-2004, Rigging Hardware

• Federal Specification FF-C-450D, Clamps, Wire Rope

• Federal Specification FF-T-276b, Thimbles, Rope

• Federal Specification RR-C-271D, Chains and

Attachments, Welded and Weldless

• ASTM F-1145-92, Standard Specification for

Turnbuckles, Swaged, Welded, Forged

• DOE-STD-1090-2004, US Department of Energy

Standard, Hoisting and Rigging

D Other Publications

• Crosby Group Inc. Catalogue

• Unirope Catalogue

• OPG Hoisting and Rigging Handbook

• EPRI Rigger’s Handbook

• The Complete Rigger’s Reference Handbook,

by Mike Riggs, www.riggsafe.com


Introduction
7

1.5 Definitions

For the purposes of this handbook, the following definitions

apply. The reader is referred to the definitions included in

OHSA as well.

Approval from Engineering: Written approval by a

Responsible System Engineer is required. This may take

many different forms including having the Engineer

complete Form-12293, Safe Lift Form, for the job. The

approval should conform to the appropriate Engineering

Decision Making procedure.

Approved: Accepted as satisfactory by a duly constituted

administrative or regulatory authority.

Authorized Person: One designated by a duly constituted

administrative or regulatory authority.

Basic Lift: A lift where despite the nature of the load being

lifted, all aspects of the lift, including consequences of

failure have been pre-approved by Engineering.

Basic Rigger: Individual who holds the basic rigger

qualification. This person may only perform basic lifts.

Bridle Sling: A sling composed of multiple legs gathered in

a fitting that goes over the lifting hook.

Cable Laid: A type of wire rope made by twisting together

a number of smaller wire ropes into one.

Category C Spill: As defined in BP-PROC-00093, Spills to

the Environment.

Centre of Gravity: The balance point of an object.

8
Introduction

Competent Person: A person who:

a is qualified because of knowledge, training and

experience to organize the work and its performance

b is familiar with the provisions of the act (OHSA) and the

regulations that apply to the work

c has knowledge of any potential or actual danger to

health or safety in the workplace. (ref: OHSA, RRO

851, 1990, Section 1(1))

Critical Lift: Any lift of an object where due to the nature of the

lift, significant expertise (Master Rigger) is required to perform

the lift. Considerations for this include, but are not limited to,

size, weight, and composition where failure of any kind would

have a significant impact on safety, production or economics.

D/d Ratio: The diameter around which a wire rope is being

bent (D) divided by the diameter of the wire rope (d).

Dead Load: Pulls or lifts on a permanently attached or

essentially immovable object which may result in overstressing

of the slings, crane, or other devices attached to the load.

Defective Equipment: Equipment that is defective or is

suspected of being defective, as evaluated by a competent

person. Defective equipment shall not be used for any purpose,

other than testing, by a competent person.

Design Factor: A factor that is applied to the ultimate or

breaking strength of a piece of equipment to determine it’s

Working Load Limit (WLL). The calculation, WLL equals

Breaking Strength divided by Design Factor, shall not be used as

an excuse for intentionally overloading the system. Also known

as Factor of Safety.

Designated Person: Selected or assigned by the employer or

employer’s representative to perform specific duties.


Introduction
9

Engineered Lift: A lift requiring engineering approval and

special attention to all features of the operation due to its

complexity.

Factor of Safety: Refer to Design Factor.

Fixed Crane: A crane, either electrically or mechanically

powered, that moves on rails or beams that are fixed to a

specific location, such as a building.

Grommet Sling: An endless loop sling made of one or

more wraps of webbing or woven from a single strand of

wire rope.

Hitch, Basket: Loading with the sling passed under the

load and both ends on the hook or a single master link.

Hitch, Choker: Loading with the sling passed through one

eye and suspended by the other.

Hitch, Vertical: Loading with the load suspended vertically

on a single part or leg of the sling.

Included Angle: The angle formed by any two adjacent

slings.

Lay: A rope whose strands rotate or twist in a certain

direction. A rope is either RIGHT LAY (strands twist to the

right like a conventional screw thread) or LEFT LAY (twist

to the left).

Lay, Langs: A wire rope in which the wires composing the

strands and the strands composing the rope are laid in the

same direction.

Lay Length: Distance for a wire strand to achieve one full

rotation as measured in the direction of the rope’s centerline.

Lay, Regular: A wire rope in which the wires of the strands

and the strands in the rope are laid in opposite directions.


10
Introduction

Licensed Operator: Refers to a crane operator certified as a

Hoisting Engineer by the Province of Ontario under the Trades

Qualification and Apprenticeship Act, O.Reg 631/94, s.3.

Lift Categories: basic lift, skilled lift, critical lift.

Lift Plan: A written plan outlining all aspects of the lift.

Lift Team: Consists of the Rigger, Signaler, Crane Operator

and Supervisor of the Lift and any other required personnel as

identified in the lift plan.

Link, Master: A steel link or ring used to support all legs of a

sling.

Load Path: The route the lift team intends to use to move the

load as identified in the lift plan.

Manual Lifting: Lifting and moving objects using only human

effort.

Master Rigger: An individual who holds a Bruce Power

master rigger qualification. They may perform Basic, Skilled or

Critical lifts.

Material Handling: Refers to any process, aided or not,

employed to move any object or thing.

Megagram (Mg): (abbr. t) One metric tonne. A weight equal

to 1000 kg (approx. 2205 lb.)

Metric Ton (Tonne): refer to Megagram. Megagram is the

preferred term on site.

Mobile Crane Operator: A worker qualified to operate a

mobile crane of a specified capacity.

Overhaul Weight: A weight attached to a hook or hook block

of a crane which pulls out the load line as the hook is lowered.

P. Eng: Professional Engineer, refer to Responsible System

Engineer. (RSE)
Introduction
11

Pendant Crane Operator: A worker qualified to operate

cranes controlled by pendant only.

Personnel Lifting: Lifting (and moving in some cases)

workers in a powered “manlift” or a suspended basket,

with or without their tools.

Radius: The horizontal distance from the centre of rotation

of a crane to a hook supporting the load.

Rated Capacity: The maximum allowable working load.

Responsible System Engineer (RSE): Professional

Engineer employed by Bruce Power who has responsibility

for craning and lifting systems on site.

Rigging: The connection of a load to a source of power so

that it can be hoisted or moved safely and predictably.

Rotation-Resistant Rope: Rope which resists unlaying

when under tension. Also known as non-spinning rope.

Safe Working Load: Refer to working load limit (WLL).

Seizing: A wrapping of fibre or wire rope around a rope or

wire rope, particularly at its ends.

Sheave: A wheel with a grooved circumference over which

a rope is bent.

Skilled Lift: A lift involving an object that is easily

controlled and where the consequence of failure is minor,

but where rigging equipment must be selected by the

personnel involved.

Skilled Rigger: An individual who holds a skilled rigger

qualification. This person may perform basic and skilled

lifts as defined in this procedure.

Softener: Engineered item used to protect the load or sling

from damage while making a lift.


12
Introduction

Stability: The tendency of an object to return to its original

position of rest after it has been displaced.

Strand Laid: Wire rope made with strands laid around a fibre

strand or wire rope core.

Supervisor of the Lift: The person responsible for all aspects

of the lift.

Suspended Loads: Loads lifted from above the Centre of

Gravity and supported via fibre or wire rope, chain or similar

flexible elements. A crane or hoist, either fixed, temporary or

mobile, is used to lift the load.

Supported Loads: Loads lifted from below the Centre of

Gravity, and supported from below by a rigid support with

(such as a forklift) or without (such as a scissors lift) a

counterweight.

Swivel: A mechanism which substantially isolates the load from

the effect of torque in the hoist rope or system.

Swivel Hoist Ring: A device used to create a lifting point on an

object via a threaded hole. A swivel hoist ring may be loaded at

any angle in either the vertical or horizontal direction.

Tag Line: A light line used to control the position of a load and

restrain unwanted motion.

Ton: A weight equal to 2000lb. Abbreviated T.

Tonne: Metric ton: 1000kg (or 2240lb)

Working Load Limit (WLL): The maximum allowable working

load established by the manufacturer or other authority and

takes into account the design factor. Note: Was once called the

Safe Working Load (SWL) on older hardware, but the term is

no longer used.

Introduction
13

1.6 Acronyms:

AF Angularity Factor

ALARA As Low as Reasonably Achievable

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

C of G Centre of Gravity

CSA Canadian Standards Association

CSAO Construction Safety Association of Ontario

EIPS Extra Improved Plow Steel

FLM First Line Manager

HPF High Density Polyethylene Fibres

IPS Improved Plow Steel

IWRC Independent Wire Rope Core

LW Load Weight

LWD Load Weight Distribution

NDE Non-Destructive Examination

OETIO Operating Engineers Training Institute of Ontario

OHSA Occupational Health and Safety Act

PPE Personal Protective Equipment

PTO Power Take Off

RDE Responsible Design Engineer

RPM Revolutions Per Minute

RSE Responsible System Engineer


14
Introduction

RRWR Rotation Resistant Wire Rope

TRA Task Risk Analysis

STAR Stop, Think, Act, Review

WLL Working Load Limit

CAUTION

The tables in this book are for reference purposes. Be

sure to read the notes accompanying a table before

using the information in it. Every effort has been made

to ensure accuracy. If there are any doubts or questions

about anything in this book, contact your supervisor or

Engineering.

Introduction
15

2.0 Personnel Requirements

2.1 Qualifications and Training

2.1.1 Supervisor of the Lift

2.1.2 Mobile Crane Operators

(Over 7,260 kg or 16,000 lb)

2.1.3 Mobile Crane Operators

(Under 7,260 kg or 16,000 lb)

2.1.4 Overhead Pendant Crane and Hoist Operators

2.1.5 Overhead Cab Crane Operators

2.1.6 Riggers

2.1.7 Signalers

2.1.8 Crew Supervisor

2.1.9 RSE for Cranes and Hoists

2.1.10 Program Owner, Maintenance Programs

2.1.11 Supplementary workers

2.2 Medical Requirements

2.3 Requirements and Responsibilities

2.3.1 General

2.3.2 Management

2.3.3 First Line Manager

2.3.4 Supervisor of the Lift

2.3.5 Operator

2.3.6 Rigger (All Levels)

2.3.7 Signaler

2.3.8 Engineering

2.3.9 Program Co-ordinator, Rigging and Lifting

Personnel Requirem ents


17

2.4 Safe Lifting and Rigging Practices

2.4.1 General

2.4.2 Control

2.4.2.1 Control of the Rigging

2.4.2.2 Control of the Crane

2.4.2.3 Control of the Load

2.4.2.4 Block Lift Technique

2.4.2.5 Control of the Lift Area

2.5 Engineering Review

2.6 Lift Categories

2.6.1 Basic Lift

2.6.2 Skilled Lift

2.6.3 Critical Lift

2.6.4 Engineered Lift

2.7 Inspection and Maintenance

Program Overview

2.8 Control and Compliance

18
Personnel Requirem ents

2.1 Qualifications and Training

2.1.1 Supervisor of the Lift

Personnel fulfilling the role of Supervisor of the Lift shall be

qualified to an appropriate level to provide informed

oversight and be accountable for the quality of the lift.

Normally, this would mean the Supervisor of the Lift would

be qualified, at a minimum, as a Master Rigger for a

Critical Lift, a Skilled Rigger for a Skilled Lift, and a Basic

Rigger for a Basic Lift.

2.1.2 Mobile Crane Operators

(Over 7,260 kg or 16,000 lb)

a Shall complete a medical examination every 24

months.

b Shall hold the appropriate Class of License for the

vehicle and crane being operated.

c Shall complete Bruce Power Rigging and Lifting

requirements, to the level required for the lift.

d Shall meet competency requirements as defined in

OHSA.

e Shall hold a Certificate of Qualification as a Hoisting

Engineer. In accordance with the Trades Qualification

and Apprenticeship Act R.R.O 1990, Regulation

1055, operators of mobile cranes with a lifting

capacity of over 7,260kg or 16,000lb do not require

a Certificate of Qualification as a Hoisting Engineer

if they are “permanently employed in an industrial

plant while performing work entirely within the plant

and premises or on the land appertaining thereto”.

Personnel Requirem ents


19

2.1.3 Mobile Crane Operators

(Under 7,260 kg or 16,000 lb)

a do not require a license, but operators shall be

competent as defined by OHSA and Bruce Power

b shall complete a medical examination every 24 months

c shall complete Bruce Power Mobile Crane training

requirements

d shall have completed Bruce Power Rigging and

Lifting requirements, to the level required for the lift

2.1.4 Overhead Pendant Crane and

Hoist Operators

a shall be competent as defined by OHSA and

Bruce Power

b shall complete a medical examination every 24 months

c shall complete Bruce Power Pendant Crane training

requirements

d shall complete Bruce Power Rigging and Lifting

requirements, to the level required for the lift

2.1.5 Overhead Cab Crane Operators

a shall be competent as defined by OHSA and

Bruce Power

b shall complete a medical examination every 24 months

c shall complete Bruce Power Cab Crane training

requirements

d shall complete Bruce Power Rigging and Lifting

requirements, to the level required for the lift


20
Personnel Requirem ents

2.1.6 Riggers

Riggers:

a Basic

shall complete Bruce Power Basic Rigging training

requirements

b Skilled

shall complete Bruce Power Skilled Rigging training

requirements

c Master

shall complete Bruce Power Master Rigging training

requirements

2.1.7 Signalers

Signalers shall complete Bruce Power Rigging and Lifting

training requirements, to the level required by the lift.

2.1.8 Crew Supervisor

The crew supervisor shall complete the requirements of a

Bruce Power Rigging Observation for Supervisors course.

2.1.9 RSE for Cranes and Hoists

The RSE shall be qualified to the master rigger level.

2.1.10 Program Owner,

Maintenance Programs

The program Co-ordinator for Rigging and Lifting shall be

qualified to the Master Rigger level.

Personnel Requirem ents


21

2.1.11 Supplementary Workers

• Supplementary workers who are qualified by virtue

of a trade qualification such as Iron Workers,

Boilermakers and Millwrights may challenge the

Master Rigger or Skilled Rigger evaluation once in

lieu of completing the course.

• Passing the test will provide qualification for one

requalification period, at which time the

requalification course will have to be completed

successfully to maintain the qualification.

• Failing the test will require successful completion of a

full course (either Skilled Rigger or Master Rigger) to

obtain a qualification.

• Bruce Power will seek another contractor if

supplemental staff fails qualification training twice.

NOTE

Any employee can work on any task under the direct

supervision of a qualified person as long as the

supervisor has assessed the individual’s competency

and both he and the employee agree that he is able to

complete the task safely. The supervisor’s assessment

can be based on past experience, interview, testing

and/or observation of completion of task. Refer to

BP-PROC-00174, Training – Administer Training

Exemptions and FORM-11153, Training Exemption

Approval.

22
Personnel Requirem ents

2.2 Medical Requirements

Medical examinations may be performed by Bruce Power

Health Services. Typical medical acceptance conditions

include but are not limited to the following:

a Vision Tests

Procedures established by the Ministry of Transport

used in certification of “G” driver’s license holder

shall be followed. Tests include Snellen, Jaeger,

Ishihara, and Field of Vision.

• SNELLEN – vision of at least 6/9 (20/30) in the

better eye, 6/15 (20/50) in the other eye with or

without corrective lenses

• JAEGER – vision of J-4, with or without

corrective lenses

• FIELD Of VISION – minimum horizontal visual

field of 120 degrees by confrontation

• have a normal depth perception

b Hearing Test

• If verbal communication systems will be used for

lifting operations the ability to hear at

conversational levels is required.

• An audiometric test is required once every 12

months.

• Normal hearing is defined by the Workplace Safety

and Insurance Board as the threshold average at

speech frequencies of 22.5 decibels in each ear

averaged over 500-3,000 Hz range.

Personnel Requirem ents


23

c General Medical Assessment

• no evidence of susceptibility to seizure, loss of

physical control or dizziness

• no evidence of physical limitations or emotional

instability that could result in a hazard to

themselves or others

• sufficient strength, endurance, agility, coordination,

and speed of reaction to meet the demands of the

equipment to be operated

24
Personnel Requirem ents

2.3 Requirements and Responsibilities

2.3.1 General

a Safe handling of loads shall be assigned by

Management to competent personnel.

b Responsibility for safe operation and proper

maintenance of rigging and lifting equipment is

shared by the following personnel:

• Management

• First Line Manager (Supervisor of Equipment)

• Supervisor of Equipment

• Supervisor of the Lift

• Operator

• Rigger

• Signaler

• Engineering

• Any other person involved in the performance of

the lift

c Depending on the complexity of the lift, one person

may hold more than one of the above positions.

2.3.2 Management

Shall:

• ensure equipment maintained for safe and predictable

operation

• involve the program coordinator in rigging and

lifting events and investigations

Personnel Requirem ents


25

2.3.3 First Line Manager

Shall ensure the following:

a The crane is suitable for the work at hand.

b Competent personnel are assigned to the work.

c The crane is properly equipped.

d Crane wire ropes are equivalent to those

recommended by the crane manufacturer.

e Weight is marked on blocks, equalizer beams, and

other crane accessories.

f The Working Load Limit (WLL) is permanently

marked on all crane accessories.

g A dynamometer, crane scale, or weigh scale is

available to check load weight.

h If the equipment is equipped with a load moment

device, it is operating properly.

i Equipment is only used within the limits set for

temperature and wind speed.

j The operator is competent as required by law and to

Bruce Power’s standards.

k An overhead travelling cab operated crane has more

than one safe exit and a safe descent system.

l A crane cab is equipped with an approved fire

extinguisher.

m Correct load ratings are available for rigging

hardware and equipment.

26
Personnel Requirem ents

n Rigging hardware and equipment have been inspected

prior to use.

o The crane is equipped with a suitable log book and

crane history is recorded.

p The lift has been assigned a risk category (Critical,

Skilled or Basic).

q Site designed or fabricated, below the hook lifting

systems and components have had site engineering

approval.

r Electrical clearance hazards to a crane or load are

identified, eliminated or accommodated for.

s Ensure that safe standards for the use of a travelling

crane as a work platform are established and

maintained. When the crane is used for such purposes

as maintenance of lighting fixtures, management must

ensure the safety of personnel from electrical hazards,

falling hazards and inadvertent movement of the

crane. All applicable regulations must be satisfied.

t Synthetic sling radiation dose is maintained As Low

As Reasonably Achievable (ALARA) and these slings

are not left in radiation fields greater than 100 mr/h

when not in use.

u The Maintenance and Inspection Program for cranes

is complied with, and that proper records are

maintained.

v Arrange for modifications to the crane as necessary

for special lifts, based on the approval of Site

Engineering.

w Ensure that the operator has more than one safe way

of exiting the crane.


Personnel Requirem ents
27

2.3.4 Supervisor of the Lift

a Shall be competent as defined by OSHA and

Bruce Power and shall be assigned to and present at

all hoisting and rigging activities.

b Should be selected from the trade group involved.

c Shall be documented on the Pre-Job Briefing form,

Form-12797, Pre-Lift Assessment Worksheet, and

Form-12293, Safe Lift Form, and shall have overall

responsibility for the lift.

d Shall be identified to all personnel involved with the

lift.

e Supervisor of the Lift, Operator, Rigger and Signaler

may be the same person.

f Shall supervise and direct all personnel involved with

the lift, maintaining an overall view of the operation

and an ability to communicate with the crane

operator during the lift.

g Shall know the location and proper operation of the

crane main shutdown mechanism.

h If equipment is not operating as planned, the

supervisor of the lift shall:

1 ensure operator places crane in safe position with

the Emergency STOP on

2 ensure that the breaker is open

3 ensure the failure and details of the failure is noted

in the log book.

4 notify operations, crane crew and work group

supervisor
28
Personnel Requirem ents

5 initiate an SCR and Work Request

6 tag and lock the pendant or cab isolation and main

isolation or provide other means to ensure no other

employee will use the crane (i.e., operator

remaining at the controls)

i Prior to approving a lift, the Supervisor of the Lift

shall ensure the following:

1 The safety of all personnel affected by the lifting

operation.

• Pre-Lift activities are carried out (Pre-Lift

assessment and Form-12293, Safe Lift Form)

• safe work area is established, including

demarcation and signage as appropriate, refer to

Zone of Influence in Section 3.0 of this handbook

2 A lift plan including, but not limited to the

following, is provided and followed. Lift plan will

include Form-12797, Pre-Lift Assessment

Worksheet, and if necessary, Form-12293, Safe Lift

Form.

3 Competent signalers are designated as required and

are identified to the operator.

4 Signaler and Operator are competent in the

communication systems used.

5 The rigging and lifting equipment have the required

load capacities for the lift.

6 The rigging and lifting equipment are in good

condition.

7 The location and proper operation of the crane

disconnect switch is known.


Personnel Requirem ents
29

4.3 General Crane Operation

a Operators shall not leave crane controls while a load

is suspended except in cases of emergency. If an

operator must leave a crane, the operator shall lower

the load, have the rigging disconnected and shut

down the power. Deviations shall be approved by the

responsible system engineer. If lowering the load will

impose personal risk, the operator should shut down

the power and exit the crane.

b If a crane fails to respond correctly, repeated

operation may make the condition worse. The

following steps should be followed:

1 stop crane operation

2 place the crane in a safe state (i.e. put the load

down where possible)

3 open the power switch and lock it then hang the

appropriate tag

4 call the Supervisor of Lift to have crane repaired

c The rated capacity of a crane shall not be exceeded.

d The lifting capacity of a crane shall not be increased

by unauthorized means such as:

• tying crane down

• guying back boom

• adding a counterweight

• adjusting hydraulic relief valve settings

• disabling load moment limiting devices, stops, limit

switches or other safety devices

e Safety devices such as load limiters or overload devices

shall not be used to determine the weight of a load.


Genera l Craning Considerations
99

8 The crane is positioned properly and rigged

adequately.

9 Electrical hazards are recognized when the crane is

in the vicinity of live apparatus.

10 The rigging and lifting equipment is:

• approved and within its serviceable date

• installed correctly

• if required, a second party verification is

completed (may be performed by any rigging

qualified person) NOTE: on single person lifts,

“Self Check” only is acceptable

11 Outriggers on a mobile crane, if fitted, are

deployed as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

12 Provide the correct weight of the load to the

operator and rigger.

13 Consult engineering if the lift must be engineered.

14 Determine if the appropriate lift classification for

the lift has been assigned by the assessor and if

not, re-designate the classification.

j During a lift, the Supervisor of the lift shall ensure

the following:

1 Unnecessary personnel are clear of the crane and

safe work area.

2 Safety precautions are taken when the lift is in the

vicinity of live electrical apparatus.

3 A test lift is completed, including a 120 second lift

and hold.

30
Personnel Requirem ents

4 At no time, will an attempt be made to lift a dead

load.

5 The WLL of rigging components are not exceeded.

6 Outriggers are used in accordance with

manufacturers’ recommendations.

7 No operator shall leave unattended the controls of

a crane or other similar lifting device with its load

raised.

k Upon completion of the lift, the Supervisor of the lift

shall ensure the following:

1 Lifting equipment is visually inspected and

returned to its proper storage area.

2 Defective items are removed from service, tagged

and the condition reported.

2.3.5 Operator

a The operator shall be competent as defined by

OHSA and Bruce Power, and must demonstrate

adequate skill and knowledge of the equipment

he/she must operate including:

• the controls

• the operating characteristics of the unit

• the load chart and manufacturer’s instructions (if

so fitted)

• the standard hand signals, or signals authorized by

local authority

• familiarity with the operating manual of the crane.

Personnel Requirem ents


31

b The operator of any crane or hoist is in charge of the

assigned equipment and prior to equipment use, shall

ensure the following:

• crane operators to fill in FORM-13209, Crane

Inspection Log and FORM-13219, Pendant Crane

Inspection Log

• approved start up procedures are performed

• the lift is within the capacity of the crane

• the crane cab is clean and orderly

• if required, the crane is equipped with serviceable

fire extinguisher

• the crane log is kept up to date

• guards are in place where required

c During the crane or hoist use, the Operator shall

perform the following:

• ensure the load is properly rigged

• ensure sheaves are free-running and hoist lines are

spooling properly on the drum

• follow manufacturer’s operating instructions in

accordance with load charts

• minimize load swing and use the block lift

technique described below

• ensure the use of tag lines to control the load when

appropriate

• take special precautions when working in the

vicinity of live apparatus

• take into account the effect of weather conditions


32
Personnel Requirem ents

• stop movement of the crane if communication with

the signaler is lost

• investigate or report unusual noises or occurrences

and enter in crane log

• follow approved shut down procedures

2.3.6 Rigger (All Levels)

Riggers shall perform the following:

a Obtain the proper type and size of rigging. (Note

that this does not apply to basic riggers.)

b Know the weight of the load and the crane and hook

capacity.

c Check slings and rigging hardware for WLL rating

and identification marks.

d Ensure rigging periodic inspection is current (i.e.

colour code, tags etc).

e Before and after use, visually inspect slings and

rigging hardware for damage.

f Properly attach rigging to the load.

g Properly attach rigging to the crane or hoist hook.

h To prevent damage, add softeners to rigging as

required.

i Attach tag line(s) if called for by the operator and

guide the load into position.

j Check rigging is positioned properly as tension is

being taken up.

k Secure or stabilize the load for transport during crane

movements.
Personnel Requirem ents
33

2.3.8 Engineering

a Shall be responsible for approving modifications or

alterations to a crane that may affect its load-bearing

ability (including weld repairs), safety systems such

as load brakes and load sensing devices or controls.

b Shall be responsible for preparing and approving

Engineered Lifts, including:

• Form-12293, Safe Lift Form, including a sketch

and the expectation of level of qualification

required for the Rigger and/or Crane Operator

• an Engineering Advice Memo (minimum, or)

• a verified Engineering Calculation (preferred)

c It is not expected that the RSE be a part of all lifts,

but should be considered as a resource.

2.3.9 Program Co-ordinator,

Rigging and Lifting

a It is not expected that the Program Coordinator be

part of all lifts but at the request of the line, the

program coordinator will provide programs oversight

for selected lifts.

b Should be available for investigations of rigging and

lifting events.

Personnel Requirem ents


35

2.4 Safe Lifting and Rigging Practices

2.4.1 General

a Rigging and Lifting operations shall be planned by

competent personnel to ensure the best methods and

most suitable equipment are employed. Planning

includes the use of Job Safety Analysis, Form-12797,

Pre-Lift Assessment Worksheet, Form-12293, Safe

Lift Form, and Pre-Job Briefings, as applicable. Safety

of personnel involved in rigging and lifting

operations largely depends upon care, common sense

and following proper procedures, for example:

• Everyone shall know their responsibilities as

assigned by line management.

• Weight of loads shall be known before selecting

rigging equipment.

• Centre of gravity must be known before lifting the

load.

• The capacity of the equipment and rigging must

exceed or match the load.

• Personnel shall be aware of surroundings and stay

clear of overhead hazards.

• All signs and directions shall be obeyed.

• The lift zone area shall be effectively controlled.

• When in doubt, STAR (Stop Think Act Review)

principles shall be used.

• The equipment must have satisfactorily passed its

regularly scheduled inspections and maintenance.

• The intended path of the load must be clear of all

obstructions and hazards, including live equipment

and other workers.


36
Personnel Requirem ents

• Skills of the workers must be up to date, and

appropriate to the equipment being used.

• The equipment must be used as designed.

• Environmental conditions that affect the operation

of the equipment and capacity of the rigging must

be anticipated, identified and compensated for.

• Rigging systems or components designed and built

in house must comply with the same standards as

purchased equipment. (Any such systems or

components must be designed by a competent

engineer who must certify that the design complies

with OHSA requirements.)

• The load shall be moved directly from starting

point to the intended ending point, without undue

delay or unnecessary stops with the load raised.

b The terms “Ultimate Strength” and “Breaking

Strength” reflect the exact, predictable behavior of a

material under specific, controlled conditions. Some

manufacturers use the term “capacity” to mean the

same thing.

Normally, WLL is based on ultimate strength with an

allowance for various unknown conditions. This may

include but is not limited to wear, deterioration, heat

exposure, and shock loading, dynamic conditions or

fatigue. It also is meant to account, to a small extent,

for human error. This allowance is referred to as

“Factor of Safety” or “Design Factor.” The safety

factor is not an excuse for carelessness or intentional

overloading of the component.

Personnel Requirem ents


37

c It is dangerous and a violation of the OHSA

regulations to intentionally load a device beyond its

safe working load.

d Both “Rated Capacity” or “Maximum Rated

Capacity” normally have the same meaning as WLL.

It is essential that the factor of safety used for any

strength-related figures be known.

e Design Factor for lifting equipment normally carries

a safety factor of five. In cases where human life is

directly involved (i.e. in lifting personnel), a safety

factor of ten is required by law. It is important to

know what safety factor a manufacturer has used for

a particular component before it is put into service.

f In assembling a rigging system, the WLL of each

component must be considered. Unidentifiable

components must not be used.

g In all cases the units of the WLL must be clearly

stated. For that reason, acceptable units are: pounds

(abbreviated “lb” or “LB”), Tons (a unit equal to

2000lb, abbreviated “T”), kilograms (“kg” is

preferred as an abbreviation) or megagrams (a weight

of 1000kg or 1 million grams, abbreviated “Mg”).

The terms “tonne”, “metric ton”, (both equal to

1000kg and abbreviated “t”) and “Long Ton”

(2200lb) while commonly used, can be confusing and

should be avoided.

2.4.1.1 Overloading a lifting device

It is unsafe, and a violation of OHSA Industrial and

Construction regulations to deliberately overload a crane

(fixed or mobile), hoist or any other lifting device, except

for the purpose of a legitimate test by a competent person.


38
Personnel Requirem ents

It is not acceptable to attempt to increase the capacity of a

crane by adding unauthorized counterweights, tying parts

down or bypassing safety overload features. Note that

modern mobile cranes have variable counterweights

composed of smaller weights that are added and removed

depending on the desired configuration. This is acceptable

as long as the maximum counterweight is not exceeded.

2.4.2 Control

There are hazards inherent in lifting that cannot be

completely eliminated. These hazards may be controlled or

minimized by properly trained Operators and Riggers

following the safe practices outlined here and in supporting

documents.

At the most basic level, a successful safe lift depends on

Control:

• control of the rigging

• control of the crane

• control of the load

• control of the lift area

2.4.2.1 Control of the Rigging

a Using the information on the Form-12293, Safe Lift

Form, rigging can be selected that will safely carry

the load. All lifting devices receive two types of

inspection. A controlled periodic (typically annual)

inspection performed by a competent person. All

lifting devices receive an indication that the

inspection has taken place, as outlined in BP-PROC-

00587, Inspection Requirements for Rigging, Lifting

and Material Handling Equipment.


Personnel Requirem ents
39

b In addition the user (Rigger/Signaler or Crane

Operator) must perform an inspection on any

equipment required for the lift at hand:

1 Before the lift: typically on receiving equipment at

the Stores Tool Crib, at which time any defective

equipment can be returned to stores before it is

taken to the job site.

2 During the lift: as the load is taken up, during the

test lift and as the load is moved along its route. If

the condition of any component of the lift changes

during the lift, the load must be landed as soon as

it is safe to do so and the defective component

removed and replaced.

3 After the load has been landed: as it is being

removed. After the lift, any equipment that has

been damaged during the lift can be segregated and

reported as damaged to the tool crib attendant

who can arrange for its disposal or repair.

2.4.2.2 Control of the Crane

a Once the rigging is installed and connected to the

crane, the load must be taken up slowly. Once

tension is established in the rigging, it should be

visually inspected to ensure that it was installed

correctly. If the rigging is not installed correctly, the

lift shall be stopped, the tension released and the

rigging re-adjusted until it is installed correctly. This

is the start of “during” the lift inspection.

b A trial lift incorporating the “lift and hold”

technique shall be performed for every lift and at

least once per shift. Make a trial lift as follows:

40
Personnel Requirem ents

1 Lift the load until it just clears the ground or floor.

The load should be no more than 4 inches (10 cm)

off the ground.

2 Hold the load until the remaining inspections are

complete. If anything is not correct, lower the load

and re-rig it to correct the problem.

3 Examine the load to see if it is hanging level. If it is

not level, the lift point is not over the centre of

gravity. The rigging must be adjusted.

4 Examine the slings. They should bear the load

evenly, with no kinks or other deformation visible.

No sling should be completely slack.

5 Examine the wear pads and/or softeners applied to

the slings. They should be in place, as installed (i.e.

they should not have moved when the load was

applied). Ensure that any wear pads or softeners

are actually protecting the sling. If not, lower the

load carefully. Examine the sling for signs of

damage. Adjust or install new wear pads or

softeners before continuing the lift.

6 Examine the spreaders, if used. The spreaders

should be level. If they are not level, the load is not

being applied evenly, defeating the purpose of the

spreader.

7 Examine any shackles, eyebolts, master links,

Turnbuckle, swivels, hoist rings or other rigging

hardware in use. They should be connected so that

each component bears the load as designed. For

example, a single shackle should bear the load in

the centre of the pin and in the centre of the bow,

not more than 45° either side of vertical.


Personnel Requirem ents
41

8 Examine the crane hook. The master link or

shackle of a bridle must sit vertically in the bottom

of the hook. Multiple fittings attached to the hook

must be balanced and applied within a total

included angle of 90° (45° either side of vertical).

Use a larger master link to attach the bridles if

required.

9 Examine the dynamometer, if used, to ensure that

it is properly engaged, and that the reading is

within the capacity of the rigging. Note: refer to

Section 3.0 on “Dead Lifts”.

10 When all trial lift inspections are complete, the lift

may proceed.

2.4.2.3 Control of the Load

While handling the load, it is important to consider:

a Once the load is lifted its weight should not change.

If the dynamometer reading changes, stop the lift and

land the load. This may indicate that the load has

“hung up” on something. Refer to section on Dead

Lifts.

b Avoid sudden loading or unloading or sudden

changes in direction. Operate the controls smoothly

in order to limit the amount of swing. Overhead

cranes shall be operated using the Block Lift

technique.

c Be aware of changing conditions in the lift area,

including weather when lifting outside (and when

travelling with a load from outside to inside), other

work taking place in the area and traffic.

42
Personnel Requirem ents

d Unless using a device specifically designed for it, no

workers are permitted to ride on a load.

e All cranes are designed to lift a load vertically. No

crane should ever be deliberately side-loaded. If a

load must be dragged sideways, use a snatch block

and a separate wire rope (i.e. not the hoist rope).

f The hoist line (and boom line in the case of a mobile

crane) must not be allowed to run out to a point

where there are fewer than three full wraps on the

drum.

g Ensure that any unused slings are not permitted to

hang loosely; hook them up to the load or the hook.

h When loading or unloading a truck the load must not

be moved over an occupied truck cab.

i Once the load is landed, ensure it is stable before

removing the rigging.

2.4.2.4 Block Lift Technique

A Block Lift is simply a lift that proceeds in one direction at

a time. For Example:

1 The load is lifted and held for 120 seconds. Once the

rigger is satisfied with the condition of the load and

rigging, the load can be lifted to its full intended

height.

2 The hoist motion is stopped and the load allowed to

come to rest.

3 The trolley motion is engaged to move the hoist in

one direction until it is aligned with its intended load

path.

Personnel Requirem ents


43

4 The trolley motion is stopped and the load allowed

to come to rest.

5 The bridge motion is engaged and the load is moved

to its intended end location.

6 The bridge motion is stopped and the load allowed to

come to rest.

7 Any additional minor adjustments to the bridge or

trolley motion are made as required to position the

load over its intended resting place.

8 The load is lowered to its resting place until all

tension is removed from the rigging and hoist rope.

This is the end of the lift.

2.4.2.5 Control of the Lift Area

a If any portion of a worker must pass under the load

during work on a suspended load, this must be noted

on Form-12293, Safe Lift Form, and approved by the

Supervisor of the Lift and Engineering.

b Barriers must be in place to prevent casual traffic in

or through the lift area. Both “barrier” and “casual

traffic” are open to some interpretation. In some

cases, barriers are not feasible. In these cases, the

Rigger and Signaler must accept the responsibility for

warning passers-by that the lift is in progress. A

second signaler may be required.

c Lifts in high traffic areas such as the main loading

bays in Unit 0 shall have a barrier and a dedicated

signaler watching and controlling both pedestrian

and vehicle traffic.

44
Personnel Requirem ents

2.5 Engineering Review

2.5.1

An engineering review shall be performed for the following:

• if the Design Factor of 5 for lifting material, or 10

for lifting people is compromised

• when rigging components must be altered

• when rigging components must be fabricated on site

• when a scaffold is used for hoisting

• when a sling angle must be less than 45 degrees

• when specifically requested in the Work Plan or by

Management or by the Supervisor of the Lift

Personnel Requirem ents


45

2.6 Lift Categories

2.6.1 Basic Lift

A Basic Lift has the following attributes:

• a repetitive lift where none of the parameters change

significantly between repetitions

• a lift where all the rigging components are pre-

selected

• a lift where the weight and C of G are known

• lifts of objects with pre-engineered lifting points

2.6.2 Skilled Lift

A Skilled Lift has the following attributes:

• lifts of an object with a known weight under 75% of

safe working load of the crane and rigging

• lifts that require one signaller only (excluding

signallers whose purpose is to control the lift area)

• lifts of an object with a stable, well-defined C of G

which may or may not be centered

• lifts of an object with or without pre-engineered

lifting points, but with a logical choker location

• lifts where the object can be landed in the same plane

from which it was lifted (i.e. objects that do not have

to be rotated vertically)

2.6.3 Critical Lift

A Critical Lift has the following attributes:

• lifts involving man baskets or other personnel lifts

• lifts where the load must be worked on while

suspended (this also requires an engineered lift)


46
Personnel Requirem ents

• lifts that require the use of more than one hoist (i.e.

to drift a load)

• lifts that require a crane and attachment to a

structural support

• lifts that require 2 or more cranes

• lifts where the C of G is above the attachment points

• engineered lifts (rigger skill level to be part of the

engineered lift assessment)

• lifts where a safety interlock must be bypassed (an

upper or lower limit for example)

• blind lifts or lifts where no radio communication is

possible or lifts involving more than one signaller (if

the second signaller is there for the sole purpose of

keeping the lift area clear, this is not sufficient for a

critical lift classification on its own)

• lifts where the object being lifted has a high potential

to get stuck leading to a “dead lift”

• lifts at 75% or more of the safe working load of the

crane or rigging, including overload tests

• lifts where the C of G could potentially change (such

as tanks or open vessels partially full of a liquid or

granular solid such as sand or salt)

• lifts where the load must be rotated vertically

• lifts where the sling angle of any sling is less than 45°

or the total included angle of the rigging (any two

slings connected together) is less than 90° in any plane

Personnel Requirem ents


47

• lifts into or out of water (this does not include

repetitive fuel handling lifts of spent fuel performed

by fuel handling operators)

• lifts of an object more than twice the width of the

trolley or 25% of the span of the bridge in size

(large, potentially awkward objects that might be

difficult to control if the load started swinging)

• lifts of an object with a replacement value that

severely impact economics. (i.e. with a replacement

value of more than $500,000 or a lead time of

greater than 12 months)

• lifts over energized equipment such as steam lines,

power lines, electrical switchgear, compressed gasses

or safety related equipment that may become

energized

• lifts of explosive, flammable or highly

contaminated/radioactive loads

• lifts where loss of control could lead to a Category C

spill or exposure of workers to a controlled substance

• lifts of an object with no pre-engineered attachment

point and no logical choker location

• lifts that require the use of adjustable rigging for the

purpose of clearing obstructions (this does not

include lifts using adjustable rigging for the purpose

of balancing a load)

• lifts that involve verifying the weight or Centre of

Gravity of a load through a test lift

48
Personnel Requirem ents

2.6.4 Engineered Lift

An engineered lift has the following attributes:

• any lift requiring 2 cranes (mobile or fixed)

• any lift whose load is more than 75% of the crane’s

load chart rating

• any lift requiring a load that is not fully supported

(extracting a generator core)

• any large lift that must be made over operating or

process equipment (75% capacity)

• any lift that may be subjected to large wind loads

• any lift of a load with an uncertain or undefined C of

G, which must be determined

• any lift involving loads with unusual weight, size,

awkwardness, or location that require special

attention during work planning sessions

Personnel Requirem ents


49

2.7 Inspection and Maintenance

Program Overview

2.7.1

The inspection and Maintenance Program is based on

OHSA requirements, applicable technical standards with

due regard for manufacturer’s recommendations and

selected best industry practices to ensure lifting devices are

maintained in a safe and functional condition.

2.7.2

Inspection requirements for rigging and lifting equipment on

the Bruce Power site can be found in BP-PROC-00587,

Inspection Requirements for Rigging, Lifting and Material

Handling Equipment.

2.8 Control and Compliance

a The Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act is

the basic governing document for all work at Bruce

Power. All workers involved in lifting activities are

expected to know, understand and comply with the

requirements of this Act.

b The rules and guidelines in this handbook will help

those involved to ensure compliance with the OHSA.

More importantly, compliance with this handbook

and the OHSA and its associated regulations will

ensure a safe workplace for everyone involved.

50
Personnel Requirem ents

3.0 Rigging and Lifting Practices

3.1 General Rigging Practices

3.2 General Hoisting Practices

3.3 Load Weight Determination

3.4 Centre of Gravity (C of G)

3.5 Load Levelling

3.6 Sling Selection

3.7 Hitch Types

3.7.1 Single Vertical Hitches

3.7.2 Bridle Hitches

3.7.3 Basket Hitches

3.7.4 Choker Hitches

3.7.5 Two Ends Down or Four Ends Down

3.8 Load Turning

3.9 Long Loads

3.10 Use of Eyebolts

3.11 Drifting a Load

3.12 The Zone of Influence

3.13 Block Lifts

3.14 Tag Lines

3.15 Avoiding Dead Lifts

3.16 Loading the Hook

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


51

3.1 General Rigging Practices

This section provides direction regarding rigging and lifting

activities in order to control hazards to personnel, and to

prevent damage to loads and rigging equipment.

All lifts must be assessed using Form-12797, Pre-Lift

Assessment Worksheet, prior to the lift being started. This

form will direct the user to Form-12293, Safe Lift Form, if

required.

a Before lifting begins, the identity and duties of the

Supervisor of Lift, the Operator, Rigger, and the

Signaler(s) shall be clearly understood by all parties. One

person may perform all roles for a single person lift.

b Load weight shall be determined before lifting begins.

c Crane cutouts or overload warning devices shall not

be used to determine if a load is within crane capacity.

d Slings, hardware, and hoists shall be inspected for

defects before and after use.

e Leather gloves shall be worn when handling wire

rope. Running lines shall not be handled.

f The load rating of fittings shall be equal to or exceed

that of the attached sling.

g Hardware (i.e. shackles) shall be used with the size of

sling for which it was designed.

h Sharp edges in contact with a sling shall be padded

with approved softeners to protect the sling.

i Slings or shackles shall be properly seated in a hook.

Hooks shall not be tip loaded.

j Hands shall be kept away from pinch points. Slings

or load attachments may be held in place with a

hook or other mechanical device.


52
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

k Personnel shall keep clear of the zone of influence

(areas in which a load could swing if rigging fails).

l The following areas shall not be entered when load

lines are under tension: (refer to Section 3.12, Zone

of Influence)

• between the pull line and the load line of a snatch

block

• potential pinch points between the load and any

other structure

• close to load lines during hoisting, lowering or

winching

m Running lines shall not be handled. A hook or other

mechanical device shall be used to guide running lines.

n When a load is resting on a sling, the sling shall not

be pulled from under the load.

o When landing loads:

• the load shall be safely landed and blocked before

being disconnected from the hoist

• adequate blocking shall be used to prevent sling

damage and to support the load

• no one shall go under a load when positioning

blocks

• only authorized personnel should be nearby when

a load is being moved (clear the area before

starting the move)

• when a line changes direction through a snatch

block, no personnel shall be in the bight of the rope

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


53

3.2 General Hoisting Practices

a The capacity of a hoist shall not exceed the capacity

of the lifting beam or anchor point to which it is

attached. An exception is permitted only if all of the

following conditions are met:

1 site Engineering approval as an engineered lift

2 shift Manager approval has been obtained

3 a job safety analysis, pre-job brief and

Form-12293, Safe Lift Form, has been prepared

and is followed

4 a dynamometer is used to ensure the lifting beam

or anchor point capacity is not exceeded

b Tags required on engineered lifting scaffold shall

include the following:

• Working Load Limit (WLL) of the lifting beam

• the scaffold inspector’s signature

• if the engineered lifting scaffold is altered from an

approved drawing, the scaffold tag shall be signed

by the responsible system engineer

c A load shall not exceed the capacity of the rigging.

d No attempt should be made to lift a “dead load”.

Excessive lifting forces may cause the load to break

loose suddenly subjecting the crane and rigging to

overloading, shock loads or reverse forces.

e Care should be exercised with loads that may “hang

up”. For example:

• concrete forms

• loads frozen to the ground

• loads sunk in viscous soil


54
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

f Loads shall not be lifted or transported over

personnel, over an occupied truck cab or over a

portable office, etc.

g Before taking the full load, the following shall be

ensured:

• slack shall be taken up slowly

• sling legs are straight and properly seated

• slings or hoist lines are not twisted, kinked or

knotted

• if the load is not balanced or level, it shall be

lowered and adjusted

h Loads shall not be lifted with unused chain falls or

rigging hanging loose.

i Loads shall be properly rigged and secured to prevent

movement or dislodging of any part. Loose objects

shall be secured or removed from the load and hoist.

j Rigging pick points should be 2 1/2” in from the end

of a load for every one foot of load length.

k Tag lines shall be used to control the load as outlined

in Section 3.14, Tag Lines.

l A “lift and hold” shall be completed.

m No one shall stand on or ride a suspended load.

n No one shall walk or stand under a suspended load.

o Personnel not involved in a lift shall not be permitted

in the area.

p When being moved, loads shall be kept clear of

adjacent obstructions.
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices
55

q During hoisting, with or without a load, personnel

shall be alert for possible snagging.

r If a load must be left suspended, it shall be lowered

to the floor or ground and the operator shall stay at

the controls. Engineering approval is required for any

other arrangement.

Rigger - APPROVE the Rig

A Annual inspection, tags or colour

P Pounds/kg’s, will the equipment handle the load

P Physical condition of the equipment

R Rig the load

O Overview of the rig, stand back and

check the set-up N, S, E, W

V Is the hook Vertically over the C of G

E Ensure the lift is going as anticipated

(level, can adjust as required)

56
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

3.3 Load Weight Determination

a Objects that are commonly lifted shall have their

weight (including units) permanently marked in a

prominent location. Preferred units are pounds (lb),

ton (T), kilogram (kg) and megagrams (1000kg = 1

Mg). The terms “metric ton” or “tonne” shall not be

used.

b Load weight may be obtained from sources such as:

1 Engineering calculations

An official Engineering Calculation is a PassPort

Controlled Document that will have a searchable

number and will be independently verified by

another Engineer. A copy of the Calculation shall

be attached to Form-12293, Safe Lift Form. The

Calculation shall include a list of assumptions

including the densities used for all materials.

2 Drawings, manuals, direct contact with the

manufacturer

• Objects intended to contain a liquid or solid

(heat exchangers, tanks, bins, gearboxes, etc.),

typically have an empty weight with a maximum

capacity or estimated maximum weight. Unless

the actual fill level and density of the material

can be verified directly (via a sight glass or

inspection port), such objects should be assumed

to be full or at their maximum weight when

sizing rigging.

• Similarly, vehicles, unless the weight is positively

known should be assumed to have a full tank of

fuel. It is important to remember that many

vehicles such as scissors lifts have two fuel

sources (propane and diesel), both of which shall

be included in the weight used to size the rigging.


Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices
57

3 Shipping papers

Shipping documents such as a way bill or bill of

lading may be considered reliable if:

• the object is in its original container

• the object has never been out of its original

container

• the container has lifting points marked on it

4 Procedures

Verified Bruce Power procedures that contain

weight information generally may be relied on.

5 Passport material information

Information in PassPort Material modules may be

treated the same as shipping information.

6 Previous Form-12293, Safe Lift Form

For repetitive jobs, many work groups prepare a

“blank” Form-12293, Safe Lift Form, with

everything filled out except the signature block.

This is acceptable as long as supporting

information for the weight is available.

7 Work Reports

A work report outlining the results of a test lift

used to confirm or refine an estimate is a source of

verification for a repeated lift.

8 Unverified calculations in the field (requires

independent verification).

58
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

Calculations made in the field, no matter who

made them must be confirmed through

independent verification by a master rigger. A

calculation made in the field relies on assumptions.

The accuracy of estimate will depend on how

accurate those assumptions are. The density of the

material may have to be assumed, since the density

of common materials such as concrete and wood

varies widely. The form of the material will also

influence the accuracy of the estimate. For

example, although solid lead is 40% heavier than

solid steel, lead shot weighs approximately the

same as solid steel.

9 Verification by test lift

It is acceptable to use a test lift to verify a field

estimate. The rigging shall be sized to suit the

estimated load. It is best practice to select the next

size larger rigging than would normally be selected

for such a lift. A load-weighing device shall be

included in the rigging set-up such that the total

weight of the object can be determined directly

(with no further calculation required). For

example, on a four-point lift the load weighing

device shall be installed between the master link

and the crane hook.

• The load will be taken up until the load-

weighing device reads 100% of the capacity of

the rigging. (That is, the load shall not exceed

100% of the rated capacity of the lowest rated

component in the rigging).

• If the load is not lifted when the lowest rated

capacity is reached the tension shall be released.


Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices
59

• The load shall be inspected to ensure that it is

not attached to a heavier object or caught on an

obstruction.

• If the load is free, the weight must be re-

calculated by another person and the rigging re-

sized before another test lift can proceed.

• Note that a load weighing device placed on one

sling of a two, three or four-legged bridle

displays sling tension, not weight.

• If the load is successfully lifted the reading on

the load-weighing device shall be recorded on

Form-12293, Safe Lift Form. The work may

proceed.

NOTE

The Supervisor of Lift is responsible to determine or

obtain the correct load weight and to notify the crane

operator and rigger.

CAUTION

The following sections deal with calculations associated

with lifting and rigging activities. Because even a small

error has the potential to lead to serious consequences,

it is important that calculations be verified as outlined in

Section 3.3, Load Weight Determination.

c Load weight may be calculated using formula in

Table 3-1 Area and Volume, and the weight of

common materials found in the following tables:

• Table 3-2 Metric Conversion Factors

• Table 3-3 Common Construction Material

Approximate Weights

• Table 3-4 Steel Plate Approximate Weight


60
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

• Table 3-5 Steel Pipe Approximate Weight

• Table 3-6 Steel Bar Approximate Weight

For example:

1 To calculate the weight of a steel plate 5 ft x 6 ft

x 3/4 inch thick.

Weight = Length x Width x Weight per square

foot from Table 3-4

= 5 ft x 6 ft x 30.6 lb per square foot

= 918 lb.

2 To calculate the weight of a solid round steel

plate 5 feet in diameter, 3/4 inch thick the area

of the circle is calculated, then the weight of the

plate.

Step 1 Area of a round steel plate:

• Area of a circle = π x Circle radius squared

= 3.14 x 2.5 ft x 2.5 ft

= 19.625 square feet

Step 2 Weight of a round steel plate:

• Weight = Area x Weight per square foot

from Table 3-4

= 19.625 square feet x 30.6 lb per

square foot

= 601 lb.

d To make calculations easier when determining total

weight of some objects, the object may be mentally

broken down into component parts or flattened into

rectangular shapes.

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


61

For example:

1 To calculate the weight of a hollow steel cylinder,

6 ft long x 5 ft diameter x 3/4 inch wall thickness.

Step 1 Calculate circumference, (distance around edge of a

circle):

• Circumference = Diameter x 

= 5 ft x 3.14

= 15.7 ft

Step 2 Mentally flatten the cylinder to form a rectangle,

and calculate the weight of the flat steel object:

• Weight = Length x Width x Weight per square

foot from Table 3-4

= 6 ft x 15.7 ft x 30.6 lb per square foot

= 2,883 lb.

e Weight of steel objects may also be estimated as

follows:

• 1 square foot, 1 inch thick weighs approximately

40 pounds

• 1 cubic foot weighs approximately 490 pounds

• For every 1/8” thickness, one square foot of steel

plate weighs approximately 5 pounds

1 For example, to estimate the weight of a steel plate

5 ft x 6 ft x 3/4 inch thick:

• Weight = (Length x Width x Thickness) x Weight

of 1 inch steel per square foot

= 5 ft x 6 ft x 0.75 inch x 40 lb per

square foot

= 900 lb.

62
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

To calculate the weight of an object to be lifted using weight

of common construction materials:

1 Calculate the total cubic feet (or meters) (Length x

Width x Thickness).

2 Multiply the total cubic feet (or meters) by the

value shown in Table 3-3 for that material.

3 To convert cubic inches to cubic feet, divide by

1,728.

Table 3-1

Area and Volume

d
b
a

d D

A =  r

A =

A =  a b

4
(D
- d
)

2
2
C = 2  r

d
D
d

l
l

V = l w h


V =


4 d
l

2
V =
4
l (D

2
- d

2 )

Where A = Area, C = Circumference, V = Volume,  = 3.14

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


63

Cubes/Rectangles

Weight = Volume x Material Weight

= (Length x Width x Height) x Unit Weight

= (4 ft x 3 ft x 2 ft) x 490

Weight = 11760
Steel 490#

2 ft.
per cu. ft.

ft.

3
4 ft

Cylinders (hollow i.e. pipe)

Weight = ((πr1
2 H) – ( π r2

2 H)) x Material Weight

Where: r1 = Outside Diameter (radius)

r2 = Inside Diameter

Weight = ((πr1
2 H) – ( π r2

2 H)) x Material Weight

= (((3.14x 2
2 ) x 10) - ((3.14x 1

2 ) x 10)) x 150

= (((3.14 x 4) x 10) - ((3.14 x 1) x 10)) x 150

= ((12.56 x 10) – (3.14 x 10)) x 150

= (125.6 – 31.4) x 150

Weight = 14, 130

2 ft.
4 ft.

Plain Concrete

4 ft.
2 ft.
150#

per cu. ft.


10 ft.

10 ft.
10 ft.

64
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

Cylinders (solid)

3 ft.

Weight = Volume x Material Weight

= (π r

2 H) x Material Weight

= (3.14(1.5)
2
x 10) x 530
10 ft.

= 3.14(2.25) x 10 x 530

Weight = 37, 444


Brass 530#

per cu. ft.

Round Plates

Weight = Volume x Material Weight

Where (H)eight is the thickness of the plate:

Step 1: Convert height (inches) to feet:

Height = 2 ÷ 12 = 1.66 ft.

Step 2: Calculate Weight

Weight = (πr
2 H) x Material Weight

= (3.14(3)
2
x 0.166) x 530

= 3.14(9) x 0.166 x 530

Weight = 2,486.31

2 in.

Brass 530# per cu. ft.

6 ft.

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


65

Table 3-2

Metric Conversion Factors

To convert Imperial units to Metric,


To convert Metric units to Imperial,

multiply by factor in column A


multiply by factor in column B

Unit of measure A Unit of measure B

Volume

Ounce (Imperial) 28.4 Millilitre (mL) 0.0352

Quart (Imperial) 1.136 Litre (L) 0.88

Gallon (Imperial) 4.55 Litre (L) 0.22

Cubic inch 16.39 Millmetre (mm) 0.061

Cubic foot 0.0283 Cubic Metre (m3) 35.3

Cubic yard 0.764 Cubic Metre (m3) 1.308

Mass

Ounce 28.3 Gram (g) 0.35

Pound 0.454 Kilogram (kg) 2.2

Ton 0.907 Tonne 1.102

Length

Inch 25.4 Millimetre (mm) 0.394

Foot 0.305 Metre (m) 3.28

Yard 0.914 Metre (m) 1.094

Area

Square inch 645 Sq. Millimetre (mm


2) 0.00155

Square foot 0.0928 Sq. Metre (m


) 2 10.76

66
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

Table 3-3

Common Construction Material Approximate Weights

MATERIAL APPROXIMATE WEIGHT

[lb/cu ft] [kg/m3]

Aluminum 165 2,640

Asphalt 85 1,360

Brass 530 8,480

Brick (common) 120 1,920

Bronze 486 7,780

Cement, Portland 94 1,500

Concrete,* plain 150 2,400

Copper 560 8,960

Earth, dry, loose 75 1,200

Earth, moist, packed 100 1,600

Glass, plate 161 2,580

Granite 179 2,860

Gravel, dry 100 1,600

Lead 708 11,335

Limestone 165 2,640

Masonry, brick 130 2,080

Masonry, hollow concrete 86 1,380

Riprap 90 1,440

Sand, loose, dry 100 1,600

Sand, gravel, packed 115 1,840

Steel, carbon 490 7,840

Steel, stainless 500 8,000

Stone, crushed 100 1,600

Water (plus container) 62 990

Wood,* soft, dry 34 540

Wood,* hard 50 800


Note:

1 Weight of container should also be considered when estimating

load weight.

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


67

Table 3-4

Steel Plate Approximate Weight

Thickness
Weight
Thickness
Weight

[in]
[lb/sq ft]
[mm]
[kg/sq m]

3/8 15.3
10 78

1/2 20.4
12 94

5/8 25.5
16 125

3/4 30.6
19 148

7/8 35.7
22 172

1 40.8
25 195

1-1/8 45.9
28 218

1-1/4 51.0
32 250

1-3/8 56.1
35 273

1-1/2 61.2
38 296

1-3/4 71.4
45 351

2 81.6
50 390

Table 3-5

Steel Pipe Approximate Weight

Diameter
Sch 80 Pipe Sch 160 Pipe

[in]
[lb/ft] [kg/m] [lb/ft] [kg/m]

1 2 3 4 6

1-1/4 3 4 5 7

1-1/2 4 6 6 9

2 5 7 9 13

2-1/2 8 12 14 21

3 10 15 19 28

3-1/2 13 19

4 15 22 28 42

5 21 31 39 58

6 29 43 53 79

8 43 64 72 107
68
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

Table 3-6

Steel Bar Approximate Weight

Diameter (in) Weight

[lb/cu ft] [kg/m]

1/4 0.2 0.3

1/2 0.6 0.9

3/4 1.5 2.2

1 2.7 4.0

1-1/8 3.4 5.1

1-1/4 4.2 6.3

1-3/8 5.1 7.6

1-1/2 6.0 8.9

1-5/8 7.1 10.6

1-3/4 8.2 12.2

1-7/8 9.4 14.0

2 10.7 15.9

2-1/8 12.1 18.0

2-1/4 13.5 20.1

2-3/8 15.1 22.5

2-1/2 16.7 24.9

2-5/8 18.4 27.4

2-3/4 20.2 30.1

2-7/8 22.1 32.9

3 24.0 35.7

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


69

3.4 Centre of Gravity (C of G)

a The C of G is the point around which the weight of

an object is evenly balanced:

• suspended loads will always move until the C of G

is directly below the suspension point

• if the hoist and hook are directly above the C of G

the load will remain level and stable

• loads which are slung above the C of G maximize

load stability

b If the C of G is not in the centre of the load, sling

legs, sling angles and load distribution may not be

equal.

c When the C of G is not in the centre of the load,

angular lift capacity tables shall not be used for sling

selection (refer to Figure 3-1).

d A load should be rigged to remain stable. The C of G

should be directly under the main hook and well

below the lowest sling attachment point before

lifting. If the load starts to swing, lift points may fall

outside the C of G triangle causing the load to flip or

a sling to be overloaded.

Unstable
Unstable
Stable

C of G is above
Hook is not above C of G and load will
Hook is above

attachment points shift until C of G is below hook


C of G

Figure 3-1

Effect of C of G on Lift

70
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

d Loads will be stable if the attachment or support

points are above a load C of G. A suspended load’s

C of G will seek the lowest level below points of

support. This is an important consideration when

lifting pallets, skids, or at the base of a load, since

these objects will have a tendency to topple (refer to

Figure 3-2 Position of Attachments)

Unstable
Stable

Figure 3-2

Position of Attachments

e Load stability is affected by sling angle. Loads will be

stable when sling angle A is greater than angle B as

shown in Figure 3-3 Load Stability, C of G and Sling

Angle.

B
A
B

Figure 3-3

Load Stability, C of G and Sling Angle

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


71

f Simply shaped objects of uniform density will have a

centre of gravity at the exact centre of the object. For

more complex and irregular objects, the C of G may

be difficult to locate. The Supervisor of the lift shall

contact Engineering for assistance

g Once the C of G has been determined, it shall be

marked on the object.

72
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

3.5 Load Levelling

a If the C of G is not directly under the hook, the load

will shift until it is.

• As loads shift out of level, sling tension will

increase in one leg and decrease in the other.

• If the angle of tilt exceeds five degrees (or one inch

per foot), rigging should be adjusted.

• Turnbuckle, chain hoists, or adjustable links should

be used to adjust sling length when not under load.

b The load in Figure 3-4 has tilted 12°. Tension in the

right-hand sling has increased, therefore the rigging

should be adjusted prior to this lift being made.

Figure 3-4

Load Leveled

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


73

3.6 Sling Selection

a The following factors should be considered when

selecting slings:

• Load: weight of the load and the C of G location

shall be known

• Hitch type: a vertical, choker or basket is chosen

based on load shape, weight and bulk

• Sling angle: capacity charts or calculations shall be

used to determine sling tension

• Length of sling: type of hitch and available

headroom

• Pick points: type and location

b Carbon steel wire rope or chain slings shall not be

used for lifting on stainless steel or batteries. It is

recommended that synthetic slings be used to prevent

damage to the stainless steel or to prevent electrical

faults involving the batteries.

c Sling materials should never be mixed between legs

of rigging arrangements in order to avoid failure due

to different properties. The exception is the use of a

lever hoist or chain hoist to balance a load by

adjusting one or more legs.

74
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

3.7 Hitch Types

3.7.1 Single Vertical Hitches

The load weight is supported by a single vertical sling leg.

• Single vertical hitches provide no control over the

load as it permits rotation which may “unlay” sling

strands. A tag line should be used to minimize sling

rotation.

• This hitch shall not be used for lifting loose material,

long loads, or loads that are difficult to balance.

• The connection point shall be directly above

the C of G.

• If the load is simple and compact, and rotation is

controlled by a tag line, this hitch will provide

adequate load control.

Figure 3-5

Single Vertical Hitch

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


75

3.7.2 Bridle Hitches

Two or more single hitches may be used together to form a

bridle hitch.

• This hitch provides excellent stability when the load

is level and the weight is distributed equally among

sling legs.

• Sling angles shall be measured to ensure that

individual legs are not overloaded.

• To distribute the load, sling leg lengths may be

adjusted with chain or lever hoists, or turnbuckle.

• Since it cannot be assumed that a three or four legged

sling will share the load equally among it’s legs, sling

size shall be calculated based on two legs carrying the

load.

Figure 3-6

Two Leg Bridle Hitches

76
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

3.7.3 Basket Hitches

a Extreme caution should be used when synthetic web

slings are used in a basket hitch. At low sling angles

one edge of the web may be overloaded and the sling

may tear.

b When using a basket hitch, the load shall be balanced

to prevent slippage and the sling legs should contain

or support the load from the sides above the centre

of gravity.

1 Double Basket Hitch: two single basket hitches are

passed under the load.

• Slings should be kept far enough apart to

balance the load and prevent slippage.

• The load should be prevented from turning or

sliding during a lift, otherwise the load or sling

may be damaged.

• Slings should be snubbed against a change in

contour to prevent slipping.

• Wire rope slings have double the capacity if

vertical and a 25:1 D/d ratio is maintained.

• If a basket results in sling angles being formed,

the WLLs for wire rope, chain and synthetic

slings shall be reduced according to Table 3-7

Basket Hitch Capacities.

• Sling angles should be 60° or greater to prevent

sling legs sliding toward the centre of the load

and no less than 45°.

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


77

Table 3-7

Basket Hitch Capacities

Angle in degrees Percentage of

Sling Leg Capacity

90° 200%

60° 170%

45° 140%

30° 100%

Figure 3-7

Double Basket Hitch

2 Double Wrap Basket Hitch: is wrapped completely

around a load, compressing the load, not just

supporting it.

• double wrap basket hitches may be used in pairs

• this hitch is excellent for handling loose pipe, or

smooth loads to prevent slippage

• slings have full 360° contact with the load and

tend to draw the load together

• sling angles less than 45° shall not be used

78
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

Figure 3-8

Double Wrap Basket Hitch

3.7.4 Choker Hitches

a Choker hitches shall be pulled tight before a lift is

made, not pulled down or hammered down during

the actual lift which may result in sling damage.

b The choke point of a choker hitch should be on the

sling body, not on a splice or fitting.

c Choker Hitch Capacities:

• choker hitches reduce the lifting capacity of a

sling

• the choke places angular loading on the sling

body, creating a bend in the sling at the choke

point

• capacity chart WLLs are based on sling angles

within the choke being greater than 45° (refer to

Figure 3-9, Minimum Sling Angle Within Choke)

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


79

• Choking action of choker hitches does not allow

the sling to adjust during a lift. A choked round

load such as a shaft of cylinder or a bundle of

lumber or tubes will rotate slightly as the slings

tighten. For this reason, it is important that both

chokers are oriented in the same direction. A

rectangular load will not rotate, so the load must

be taken up very slowly, while the rigger ensures

that the load is centered under the hook and

slings are taken up equally.

NOTE

In some cases, opposite orientation of slings may be

preferred for a vertical lift; consult engineering.

• If the angle of choke is less than 120°, the WLL

of a sling shall be reduced according to Table 3-8

Angle of Choke.

• A choke angle less than 60° requires engineering

approval. This includes use of a “zero degree”

choke to control a load with a high C of G.

Table 3-8

Angle of Choke

Angle of Choke
Percent of Sling Rated Capacity

in Degrees
To be used in a choker hitch

Over 120 100

90 - 120 87

60 - 89 74

30 - 59 62

0 - 29 49

80
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

Figure 3-9

Minimum Sling Angle Within Choke

d Types of choke hitches:

1 Single Choker Hitch: forms a noose in the sling. A

shackle should be used to form the choke. To

prevent the shackle pin from unscrewing, the sling

eye shall be positioned around the pin.

• provides average load control

• only intended for simple loads that are relatively

short

• does not provide full 360° contact with the load

• shall not be used to lift loads that are long,

loosely bundled, or difficult to balance

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


81

Figure 3-10

Single Choker Hitch

2 Double Choker Hitch: two single chokers spread to

provide load stability.

• double choker hitches will not completely grip

the load

• the load is less likely to tip than with a single

choker hitch

• double choker hitches are better suited to handle

loosely bundled loads

• sling angles less than 60° shall not be used

Figure 3-11

Double Choker Hitches

Note both slings are choked in the same direction


82
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

3 Double Wrap Choker Hitch: is formed by

wrapping a sling completely around the load then

attaching it to the vertical leg.

• provides excellent load control

• has full 360° contact with the load, drawing it

tightly together

• should be used in pairs on long or hard to

balance loads

• should be adjusted to equalize the load in each

sling leg

• shall not be used at sling angles less than 45°

Figure 3-12

Double Wrap Choker Hitch

4 Doubled Choker for Load Turning:

• A doubled choker may be used to turn a load

with a single sling as follows:

i place sling eyes on the top of the load pointing

in the opposite direction to the intended

direction of the turn


Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices
83

ii pass the centre of the sling around or through

the load, up through both sling eyes to the hook

iii eyes should not be placed on the hook, or only

one leg will support the load

• The load automatically equalizes between the

two supporting sling legs.

• This hitch provides control over the load during

the entire turning operation.

• The hitch will remain tight during the turn, and

will not scrub against the load.

Figure 3-13

Load Turning

3.7.5 Two Ends Down or Four Ends Down:

(also known as inverted basket)

a Engineering approval is required.

b This hitch has caused load shift accidents, and is not

recommend due to poor load control characteristics.

c The inverted basket hitch shall be used with extreme

caution as the sling is free to move within the hook.


84
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

d The heavy end of an unbalanced load will drop

unless tied back to the hook.

e When the lifting point is below the C of G, this hitch

shall not be used.

f Excellent load control may be achieved by using an

inverted basket on one end and a two leg bridle on

the other. Four sling legs will carry the load.

Figure 3-14

Sling Eyes Down

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


85

3.8 Load Turning

a Load turning is considered an engineered lift.

b All rigging components shall be rated accordingly

(not all legs will be attached at one time).

c To maintain load control, slings shall support the

load above the C of G.

d Swivel hoist rings should be used instead of eyebolts.

e Eye nuts shall not be used.

Figure 3-15

Turning a Load

86
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

3.9 Long Loads

Long slender loads may be difficult to control and may

bend if a single leg hitch is used.

a To keep loads stable, spreader beams or two double

wrap basket hitches with sling angles of 45° to 60°

should be used.

b An approved lifting container with a WLL shall be

used when hoisting a load vertically as shown in

Figure 3-16 Long Loads.

NOTE

This configuration can be applied with a sling but it is

NOT acceptable to rig the load in this manner using a

crane line. (eg. the whip line on a mobile crane.)

Figure 3-16

Long Loads
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices
87

3.10 Use of Eyebolts

• Slings shall never be passed through eyebolts.

• Slings should be connected to eyebolts through the

use of shackles.

3.11 Drifting a Load

a Hoists and cranes shall never be side-loaded.

b Where loads must be drifted, the following should be

performed:

1 Place one hoist roughly above the original location

of the load and one in the intended location of the

load.

2 Increase tension in one hoist and decrease it in the

other to move the load sideways.

c Lever hoists shall be used when drifting a load or

chain hoists that have self-levelling drive sprockets.

d When drifting will involve angles less than 45 degrees

(which is common), this will be considered an

engineered lift.

88
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

3.12 The Zone of Influence

The zone of influence is an area around the load

representing the highest potential for loss of control over

the load to cause injury or other losses.

a The rigger shall ensure that there are no workers,

possible interferences or potential hazards within the

zone of influence and should control the area

through the use of barriers.

b The zone of influence is an area twice the width by

twice the length of the load, with the most likely

zone being 1.5 times the width by 1.5 times the

length.

c Tag lines should be long enough to allow the worker

holding it to stand outside of the zone of influence.

The width of the load path is equal

to the width ofthe Zone of Influence,

perpendicular to the direction of travel

Halfthe
C of G

length
Load

Length xWidth
Zone ofInfluence

Twice the Length

Half the
x

width
Twice the Width

Highest potential for

movement in this area as the

Preffered
load is moved horizontally

direction of
(Bridge, Trolley, Jib)

horizontal

motion

Load may
Highest potential for

Most likely maximum


movement in this area as the

rotate
movement is about
load is lifted from the floor/grade

1 1/2 times the length

1 1/2 times the width

Figure 3-17

Zone of Influence

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


89

3.13 Block Lifts

A block lift is a lift planned such that each crane movement

(hoist, bridge, trolley) takes place independently.

a Block lifts should be used wherever feasible. Only

under extreme circumstances which make it

impractical or impossible to move the load under

block lift shall more than one movement take place

at a time.

b Engineering approval is required to perform lifts

without the use of block lifts.

90
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

3.14 Tag Lines

a OHSA Regulations for Industrial Establishments,

section 51.2 (b) I99) states:

“Where a worker may be endangered by the rotation

or uncontrolled motion of a load, one or more guide

ropes is used to prevent rotation or other

uncontrolled motion.”

b Tag lines shall be used for:

• large, awkward loads (such as long pumps, turbine

rotors or heat exchangers)

• loads with high or changeable C of Gs such as bins

containing a granular solid like sand or tanks

partially filled with a liquid

• loads which are more than twice the width of the

trolley or 35% of the span of the bridge

• loads which must be rotated vertically or

horizontally

• loads which must be moved in “tight spaces” such

as near the turbine generator, or above the boilers

c Tag lines shall be a synthetic fibre rope in good

condition. Wire rope shall not be used as a tag line.

d Attachments to the load such as extension cords,

grease lines or hoses shall not be used as tag lines.

e The tag line material shall be 1/2” or larger in

diameter.

f The worker shall wear gloves when handling the tag

line.

g The tag line shall be attached to the load at a

convenient place at or below the C of G.


Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices
91

h The tag line shall be securely attached using a knot

approved in this handbook. A rope with a fixed loop

at the end may be choked through the attachment

point.

i The tag line shall not be wrapped around any part of

the body when in use. It shall be loosely held in the

hand.

92
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

3.15 Avoiding Dead Lifts

a A dead lift is a lift where the load is not free to

move, resulting in the crane or hoist trying to “pick

up the building”.

b With engineering approval, a dead lift can, under

controlled circumstances, be used as a load test.

c Common causes of dead lifts are:

• the load is not completely unbolted from its

original location (i.e. valves)

• the load was initially free but hit an obstruction

while being lifted and stopped moving

• the load was not fastened down originally but it is

stuck in place by its seal or foreign objects (floor

slabs and hatches)

• the load is frozen to the ground

d It should be independently confirmed that the load is

free before attempting to move it with a crane or

hoist.

e Dynamometers may be used and their values

compared to the known weight of the load. NOTE:

Initial forces required to start the load may be greater

than its weight, but should not exceed the weight by

more than 10%.

f To free a stuck load, it is preferable to “push” with

hydraulic jacks rather than “pull” with a crane or

hoist.

g Observers may be placed near the hoistway to watch

the load and notify the rigger or operator if it is in

danger of becoming caught on an obstruction.

Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices


93

h When lifting outside, in temperatures that have been

below freezing in any of the 3 preceding days,

additional care shall be taken. A forklift may be used

to free the load by moving it sideways prior to lifting.

3.16 Loading the Hook

a Whatever attachments are used, they shall sit in the

very bottom of the hook.

b Attachments to the hook shall not seat outside of

45° on either side of the vertical. Newer hooks have

“Quick Check” marks to ensure the rigging is within

these specs.

c If all rigging does not fit within this area, then one or

more master links or shackles should be used to

spread out the load. For example a 1-2-4 formation.

d The hook shall never be loaded at or near the tip.

Figure 3-18

1-2-4 Formation

94
Rigging and Lifting Pra ctices

4.0 General Craning Considerations

4.1 General

4.2 Equipment Inspection and Maintenance

4.3 General Crane Operation

4.4 Work Protection

4.5 Parts of Line

4.6 Electrical Precautions

4.6.1 Limits of Approach

4.6.2 Working in the Vicinity of Live Electrical

Apparatus

4.6.3 Working Near Transmitters

4.6.4 Grounding Requirements

4.6.5 Accidental Electrical Contact

4.7 Weather Conditions

4.7.1 Wind

4.7.2 Temperature

4.7.3 Icing

4.8 Communication

4.8.1 Radio Communication

4.8.2 Signaler

4.8.2.1 Standard Craning Hand Signals

Genera l Craning Considerations


95

4.1 General

This section provides guidance for crane operation, hazard

control, and communication including hand signals.

Operator - APPROVE the Crane operation

A Annual inspection tags (E stop is activated)

P Physical condition of the crane

(rails, stops, buttons, etc.)

P Power on

(ensure crane numbers and breaker match)

R Buttons will Return to neutral

(E stop in power on)

O Operate, check the up button makes it go up,

check N, S, E, W

V Verify both the limits and brakes 2 ways

E Examine the cables operation and

hook/block assembly

96
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

4.2 Equipment Inspection

and Maintenance

BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for Rigging,

Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, governs

inspection and maintenance of overhead and mobile cranes

at Bruce Power. It references the required record sheets for

all classes of lifting equipment.

a Cranes shall be inspected and maintained to meet the

requirements of the following:

• Crane manufacturer

• Bruce Power inspection and maintenance programs

• OHSA and CSA regulations

NOTE

Most cranes require an annual inspection. Heavily used

cranes such as the Turbine Hall Cranes and the

Secondary Irradiated Fuel Bay (SIFB) Dry storage flasking

cranes require bi-annual inspections based on their

higher use, heavier loads or both.

b Initial, periodic and pre-use crane or hoist

inspections, maintenance and repairs shall be

recorded in a log book or other permanent record.

c Defective or damaged equipment shall not be used.

d Replacement parts shall, where possible, be obtained

from the original equipment manufacturer. Where

this is not possible, replacement parts shall meet or

exceed original manufacturer specifications.

e All welding shall conform to the requirements of

CSA Standard W59. Adjustments and structural

repairs shall be made in accordance with the

specifications provided by the manufacturer or a

professional engineer experienced in weld repair.


Genera l Craning Considerations
97

f No crane or similar hoisting device shall include

sections not designed or approved for that device.

g Lifting equipment shall only be modified by a

professional engineer, and approved by the

manufacturer where possible.

h Inspection dates are absolute. If the inspection cannot

be completed by the due date, the crane must be

locked out of service and it cannot be used for

anything other than a test by a competent person.

98
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

f Limit switches shall not be blocked, adjusted or

disconnected.

g Sudden loading or unloading of hoist lines and crane

structure shall be avoided (may cause shock loading).

h Crane controls should be moved gradually to avoid

abrupt, jerky movements of the load.

i Controllers should be stopped momentarily in the off

position before being reversed except to avoid an

accident. A slight pause gives the braking mechanism

time to operate.

j The boom tip or trolley and load lines should be

directly over the load’s centre of gravity and hoist

lines should be vertical before a lift is made.

k If cable is removed from a drum, it shall be re-wound

in the correct direction.

l A minimum of 3 wraps shall remain on the cable

drum at all times.

m Hoist lines shall be properly seated on drums and in

sheaves.

n Crane hoisting ropes shall be kept vertical. A crane

shall not be used to drag a load sideways or be

subjected to side loading.

o Loads should not be carried over operating

machinery unless the crane operator is specifically

authorized to do so.

p When two or more cranes are used to make a lift,

one signaler shall direct both cranes.

100
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

q Personnel in the immediate area of a lift shall be

made aware that the load is to be moved.

r If available, the crane warning device shall be

sounded when moving loads.

s Personnel shall stand clear while loads are being

moved.

t Potentially dangerous substances shall only be carried

following approved rigging practices (i.e. oxygen and

acetylene cylinders).

u Slings shall not be drawn from beneath a load using

a crane.

v After a load is disconnected from the crane, the hook

should be lowered and the rigging removed prior to

moving the crane. Slings, chains, or wire rope should

not be dragged.

w An overhead crane which is to be used as a fall arrest

anchor only may be used without an operator present

if it is locked out.

x An overhead crane which has a purpose-designed

attachment in place of the hook is not required to

have the controls attended. Similarly the hook of an

overhead crane may remain suspended without an

operator present.

y A crane which is in the process of being rigged for a

lift may be left unattended if it is locked out.

z A crane may remain attached to a load which is

supported on the floor or ground if there is no

tension in the hoist line and it is locked out.

Genera l Craning Considerations


101

4.4 Work Protection

a When working on cranes during assembly, repair,

maintenance or lubrication, work protection shall be

applied in accordance with the requirements of the

Work Protection Code.

b If a defect affects safe operation of a crane or

machine is out of service (o/s) awaiting inspection or

maintenance and locked in open position, the local

disconnect switch shall be opened using proper

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and a caution

tag shall be hung on the breaker and on the crane.

Alternately, to prevent others from using crane, the

operator may remain at the controls.

102
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

4.5 Parts of Line (Mobile Cranes)

a Hook blocks shall be reeved with sufficient parts of

line to support the intended load.

b Size, grade and construction of wire rope shall be

known. If the manufacturer’s recommendations are

not available or doubt exists about the grade or

construction of a wire rope, line management shall

obtain site engineering support.

Genera l Craning Considerations


103

4.6 Electrical Precautions

Working near live electrical apparatus may be described as

operating where any part of the machine, boom, rigging or

load at the greatest possible reach or swing is closer than

15 m (50 ft) to the “limit of approach” to live apparatus

(refer to Figure 4-1 Vicinity of Live Apparatus).

Figure 4-1

Vicinity of Live Apparatus

4.6.1 Limits of Approach

Limits of approach to live lines or apparatus for cranes and

shovels set out in Table 4-1 Limits of Approach for Cranes,

shall be strictly adhered to (Bruce Power Corporate Safety

Rules).

104
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

4.6.2 Working in the Vicinity of Live

Electrical Apparatus

a While working in the vicinity of live electrical lines or

apparatus:

1 Workers shall be instructed to remain clear and out

of contact with all parts of the crane and load,

except to attach or detach the load.

2 Conditions/Restrictions for Voltage Range

Clearance to be Phase to Phase Maintained.

3 The distances stated must be strictly followed for

all parts of the equipment including the booms,

hoisting cables and any part of the load being

hoisted.

4 Additional clearance must be allowed for by

change in boom angle and swing of the hoisting

cable and load while it is being raised, lowered or

moved laterally.

5 A qualified signal person must be appointed to act

as a dedicated observer and signal the operator

whenever the equipment approaches these specified

distances.

b Loads or attached rigging may pick up an electrical

charge. Workers shall electrically ground loads or

rigging before touching them.

c Use of tag lines should be avoided. If tag lines are

necessary, they shall be made of non-conductive

material (which is difficult to obtain and to maintain

as a non-conductor).

106
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

d Communications with the authority controlling the

live apparatus shall be maintained by the Supervisor

of Lift to ensure that all parties understand the

following:

1 when operations begin

2 when operations are completed

3 when any unusual circumstances arise from

operations

4 when any change is made which may affect craning

operations

e A signaler shall direct movement of cranes in the

vicinity of live lines or live apparatus.

f Proximity warning devices, hook insulators, insulating

boom guards or devices used to assist operation shall

not be relied on to provide protection.

g A “Hold Off” on apparatus may be obtained while

work is in progress. Bruce Power Work Protection

Processes shall be followed.

h When cranes regularly pass under high voltage lines,

extra precautions may be required such as using rider

poles, signalers, observer, or making lines more visible.

4.6.3 Working Near Transmitters

a When operating near radio, TV or microwave

transmitters, crane booms may act like antennas,

electrically charging the boom and load. This charge

may cause burns to personnel handling the load.

Grounding will not eliminate cranes from being

charged.

Genera l Craning Considerations


107

b To isolate loads, synthetic web slings may be used to

suspend the load.

c Operators are isolated in a crane cab, but should

wear rubber gloves when getting on and off a crane.

4.6.4 Grounding Requirements

a When working in the vicinity of live electrical

apparatus, cranes shall be grounded.

b The degree of protection from ground probes shall be

considered very limited and precautions taken

accordingly. Grounds shall not be relied on for full

contact protection.

c The best available means of grounding shall be

employed, such as:

• ground probes

• permanent ground buses

• ground mats

d Cranes shall be equipped with grounding lugs (front

and rear), a ground probe and an 8 m (25 ft) ground

lead.

1 In locations where ground fault currents are less

than 22,000 amps, a single 2/0 ground conductor

with T-handled flat faced clamp may be used.

2 In locations where ground fault currents are

greater than 22,000 amps and less than 34,000

amps, a single 4/0 ground conductor with T-handle

flat face clamp may be used.

108
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

3 In locations where ground fault currents are

between 34,000 amps and 70,000 amps, a double

4/0 ground conductor must be used with grounding

studs and key hole clamps at both ends.

4 If an aerial device is to be used in more than one

station, and one of the stations has a ground fault

current rating in the 34,000 to 70,000 amps range,

it is recommended that the unit be equipped with

double 4/0 grounds and grounding studs.

e A vehicle in the stowed position may be moved without

grounds, but if the boom is raised, it shall be grounded.

f If permanent ground connections to the aerial device

are used, (i.e. permanently attached to the aerial device

via bolted or welded connectors), the loose end shall

be completely unwound and connected to the grid.

g When ground probes are used, the area shall be

marked off to restrict access and the probe shall:

• be driven as close as possible to the crane

• be at least 1 m (3 ft) into the earth

• be connected to the ground cable before the cable

is connected to the machine

• have good bare metal to metal connections

between the ground probe and machine

h Workers shall keep clear of driven ground probes

while the machine is operating.

i Leads shall be disconnected from the machine before

being disconnected from the ground probe.

j Cranes in areas surrounded by a permanent ground

bus shall be grounded to the bus.


Genera l Craning Considerations
109

k If using a ground gradient control mat, equipment

shall be placed on and bonded to the mat. The

bonded area shall be enclosed with a double fence to

prevent workers from stepping on and off the mat

during crane operation.

4.6.5 Accidental Electrical Contact

WARNING

Exiting a crane that is in contact with live electrical

apparatus may cause death or serious injury. Under no

circumstances shall an operator step down from a crane

and be in contact with the ground while touching the

crane.

a If a crane or load makes contact with an electrical

conductor, energized or not, the operator shall in the

best possible manner, remove the machine from

contact.

1 A machine may be removed from contact by

moving the boom or the machine.

2 The crane operator shall remain in the crane cab

until electrical contact is cleared unless it is unsafe

to do so.

3 If forced to leave a crane while in contact with

electrical apparatus, the operator shall jump clear

of the crane with feet together, maintain balance

and shuffle slowly away from the affected area in

order to minimize the distance between feet (step

potential).

b Accidental electrical contacts shall be reported

promptly. All cranes that have experienced accidental

electrical contact shall undergo a thorough

inspection.
110
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

4.7 Weather Conditions

4.7.1 Wind

Mobile cranes are affected by wind pressure on loads,

particularly those loads with large surface areas. The lateral

force from wind on a load is applied to the boom tip.

a The effect of wind on a mobile or gantry crane is not

factored into load charts.

b Lateral force is a serious factor on longer booms,

even when the load is not raised.

c If strong wind conditions exist, the lift should be

deferred.

d Crane manufacturer’s specific limitations for wind

loads shall be followed.

e Prior to lifting, wind and kinetic forces shall be

considered together with the load weight.

4.7.2 Temperature

a Steel may loose elastic properties and become brittle

at low temperatures where shock or impact loads,

and stress concentrations at minor defects, such as

nicks may cause failure of the metal.

b Heavy lifts should be scheduled to occur at moderate

temperatures, unless the steel in the crane is known

to have good low-temperature characteristics.

Genera l Craning Considerations


111

4.7.3 Icing

Freezing rain and snow on crane boom and jib surfaces

increase loading due to weight and the larger surface area

exposed to the wind. These forces are not factored into load

charts.

a Falling ice chunks present a hazard to personnel.

b If drum or sheave grooves fill with ice, wire rope may

spool out of position.

c Reduction in capacity for an iced crane is difficult to

estimate, therefore work should be deferred until ice

deposits have been removed from the crane.

112
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

4.8 Communication

The choice of communication method is a decision left to

the Rigger and Operator, however, two points are

particularly important:

a Communication shall be constant.

b Every communication method must have a backup.

4.8.1 Radio Communication

The following are guidelines for radio communication

between crane operators and signalers.

a Three-way communication using phonetic alphabet

should be used to reduce errors.

b All parties should speak slowly and clearly.

c Radios shall be tested prior to lifts from all points

that communication will be required.

d For safety reasons, voice-activated radios shall not be

used for signaling purposes.

e Questions regarding radio operating procedures,

equipment types, availability, frequency coordination

and licensing, should be referred to line management.

f The rigger/signaler shall speak constantly, without

expecting a regular response from the operator.

g The radio frequency should not be used for anything

else.

Genera l Craning Considerations


113

4.8.2 Signaler

a Only one competent signaler shall direct the

movement of a crane at any one time.

b If a signaler is required to be replaced during a lift,

there shall be a clear transfer of responsibility from

one signaler to another.

c Competent auxiliary signaler(s) may be used for

specific lifts (i.e. where the pick up or receiving

points are out of sight of the crane operator).

d A signaler shall be in constant communication with

the crane operator throughout the entire lift

operation, either visually by hand signals, or audibly

by radio or other means.

e The signaler shall be in full view of the operator at

all times. A lime vest shall be used where appropriate

to increase signaler visibility.

f If an operator loses contact with the signaler for any

reason, the operator shall STOP crane movement

until communication is restored.

114
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

4.8.2.1 Standard Craning Hand Signals

Hand signals for mobile and bridge crane operations are

shown in Figure 4-3 Craning Hand Signals. Note that not

all hand signals apply to both cranes (Mobile and

Overhead).

a Hand signals may be used to provide direction to

crane operators.

b Wherever a standard signal exists for a desired crane

movement, it shall be used. Alternate crane signals

may exist to suit specific circumstances, but shall

only be used once the operator and signaler

understand the signal.

c Signalers and operators shall understand each other

completely.

d Operators shall disregard all signals from other

persons, except the stop signal.

Genera l Craning Considerations


115

Figure 4-3a

Craning Hand Signals


116
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

Figure 4-3b

Craning Hand Signals


Genera l Craning Considerations
117

Figure 4-3c

Craning Hand Signals


118
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

Figure 4-3d

Craning Hand Signals


Genera l Craning Considerations
119

Figure 4-3e

Craning Hand Signals


120
Genera l Cra ning Considerations

Figure 4-3f

Craning Hand Signals

Genera l Craning Considerations


121

5.0 WIRE ROPE

5.1 General

5.1.1 Size

5.1.2 Construction

5.1.3 Grade of Steel

5.1.4 Core

5.1.5 Lay

5.1.6 Rope Types

5.1.7 Description

5.1.8 Strength

5.2 Wire Rope Terminations

5.2.1 General Considerations

5.2.2 Swaged Fitting and Spelter Socket

5.2.3 Hand Splice

5.2.4 Flemish Eye Splice for Six-Strand Wire Rope

5.2.5 Clipped Eye

5.3 Wire Rope Handling

5.3.1 Handling

5.3.2 Winding Wire Rope on a Drum

5.3.3 Fleet Angle

5.4 Use of Wire Rope for Cranes

5.4.1 Application

5.4.2 Wire Rope Fittings for Cranes

5.5 Pre-Use Inspection

Wire Rop e
123

5.1 General

A wire rope is a machine with moving parts. As such, it is

subject to wear and mechanical damage. Regular inspection

of wire ropes by the user and by maintenance personnel will

prevent unsafe ropes from being used.

a Wire rope consists of preformed wires assembled

(laid) into strands. The strands are then laid around a

central core. Steel is the most common wire rope

material. The type and size of wire used, the number

of wires in a strand, the

number and type of

strands in a rope, and

type of core determine

the strength of a given

size of wire rope.

b The size, shape, lay and

arrangement of the wires

and strands as well as

the material used

combine to determine

the strength, fatigue

resistance and flexibility

of a wire rope. In

general a rope with a

smaller number of larger

wires will be stiffer than

a rope with more,

smaller wires.

Figure 5-1

Basic Composition of

Wire Rope

(Courtesy ofUnirope)
124
Wire Rop e

5.1.1 Size

Wire rope size is expressed as its nominal diameter in inches

or millimeters, and its length in feet or metres. The diameter

is measured over the widest points as shown in Figure 5-2

Measuring Wire Rope Using Calipers.

Figure 5-2

Measuring Wire Rope Using Calipers

(Courtesy ofUnirope)

5.1.2 Construction

a The number of strands in a wire rope may vary from

3 to 41 and the number of wires in a strand may

vary from 7 to 49. Six is the practical minimum for

strands, and most commonly used ropes have six

strands, with or without an independent core (fiber

or wire).

b Ropes made with larger individual outer wires may

be less flexible but are more resistant to abrasion and

crushing. The most common wire ropes used in slings

have six strands and a minimum 15 wires per strand.

These ropes come in two classifications based on

flexibility, 6 x 19 classification with 15 to 26 wires

per strand and 6 x 37 classification with 27 to 49

wires per strand.

Wire Rop e
125

6x19 Class IWRC 6x37 Class Warrington


8x19 Class Warrington

Seale IWRC
Seale IWRC

19x7 Rotation resistant Compac® six-strand


Python® Super 8C*

die drawn*

Compac® Rotation
Python® Construct 6
Python® super 6R/8V*

Resistant*
(pre-stretched)*

Galvanized 7x7 “Aircraft


Stainless Steel 7x19
PVC coated “Aircraft

Cable”
“Aircraft cable”
Cable”*
Figure 5-3

Commonly Used Wire Rope Construction

*Proprietary Rope, similar to the one above it

Courtesy ofUnirope

126
Wire Rop e

c Within a given rope size, strength may vary greatly

depending on construction and grade. Applicable

standards or manufacturer’s literature contain

additional information. Various construction and

grades of wire rope are shown in Figure 5-3,

Commonly Used Wire Rope Construction.

d All wire rope used for cranes and hoists shall be the

type, size, grade, and construction recommended by

the crane or hoisting device manufacturer.

e Engineering approval is required to substitute material,

construction or both for any running wire rope.

Deviation from manufacturer’s recommendations

require approval by site engineering.

f All shop-made terminations should have a thimble to

prevent damage from crushing.

5.1.3 Grade of Steel

a Only wire rope marked 110/120 Improved Plow Steel

(IPS or 1770 N/mm2 ) or grades exceeding this

specification shall be used. Common grades are as

follows:

• Extra Improved Plough Steel (EIPS), Grade

115/125 equivalent to metric grade 1960

• Extra Extra Improved Plough Steel (EEIPS), Grade

130/140 equivalent to metric grade 2160

b Some cranes or hoists may be equipped with higher

strength ropes.

Wire Rop e
127

5.1.4 Core

The most common crane or hoist wire rope is Independent

Wire Rope Core (IWRC). In general, only IWRC ropes should

be used for hoisting applications. Some older cranes and hoists

were originally supplied with fibre core (FC) ropes. Fibre core

ropes are weaker, but are more flexible. Caution should be

exercised before a FC rope is replaced with an IWRC rope.

Engineering approval is required for all modifications.

CAUTION

Slings with fibre cores must not be used.

Breaking strength is not to be used as a capacity. The design

factor must be applied to the rope, based on use. The

minimum design factor for general lifting activities is five;

for lifts that directly support human life it is ten. Refer to

Table 5-1 Working Load Limit for Selected Wire Rope

(pounds) and Table 5-2 Working Load Limit for Selected

Wire Rope (kilograms).

5.1.5 Lay

a Lay is the distance for a wire rope strand to achieve

one full rotation, as measured in the direction of the

rope centerline.

b Wire rope is available in either right lay or left lay,

and in regular or Langs lay. Right regular lay is the

most common type used in normal rigging.

• Right lay wire rope strands twist to the right like a

conventional screw thread and left lay strands twist

to the left.

• A regular lay wire rope is one in which the wires

composing the strands and the strands composing

the rope are laid in opposite directions.


128
Wire Rop e

• A Langs lay wire rope is one in which the wires

composing the strands and the strands composing

the rope are laid in the same direction.

c Different combinations produce different properties.

In general, regular lay ropes are stiffer than Lang lay

ropes, which tend to form kinks and hockles more

easily.

d When replacing ropes, both the rope lay and strand

lay must be as originally specified by the

manufacturer unless Engineering approval is

obtained.

e The surface wires of a right regular lay rope have a

minimum exposure to wear and line up with the axis

of the rope.

Figure 5-4

Right Lang Lay

(Reference: CSAO Rigging Manual (1996), Fig .9)

Figure 5-5

Right Regular Lay

(Reference: CSAO Rigging Manual (1996), Fig .9)

Wire Rop e
129

5.1.6 Rope Types

a All six-strand wire ropes are pre-formed. Wires are

shaped to fit their position in the finished rope. Pre-

formed rope resists unlaying when cut.

b Rotation-resistant or non-rotating ropes may be

required for some applications, such as hoists with

long drops. These ropes may not always be directly

interchangeable with conventional ropes of the same

size or strength. The hoist or rope manufacturer shall

be consulted before substitutions are made.

c Proprietary ropes may include special materials,

construction, or lay-ups. These ropes may offer

significant performance advantages under some

situations. Care shall be exercised when replacing a

standard rope with a proprietary rope, site

engineering or the hoist manufacturer shall be

consulted for directions.

5.1.7 Description

a Diameter is not a sufficient description of a wire rope,

and cannot be used as an accurate indication of strength

without also considering material and construction.

b Wire rope description should include the following:

• diameter and length (e.g. 5/8 inch x 125 ft)

• type (e.g. 6 x 25 Filler, Grade 115/125, IWRC,

Right Regular Lay, Pre-formed)

c Metric example:

• diameter x length (e.g. 18 mm x 450 meter)

• type (e.g. 6 x 25 Filler, Grade 1960, IWRC, Right

Regular Lay, Pre-formed)


130
Wire Rop e

5.1.8 Strength

a Table 5-1 and table 5-2 provide working load limits

for selected 6x19 and 6x37 class ropes. These figures

are provided as a reference only.

Table 5-1

Working load limit for selected wire rope (pounds)

Factor ofsafety = 5

Rope dia.
Weight
6x19 Class IWRC
6x37 Class IWRC

[in.]
[lb/ft]
SWL in Pounds
SWL in Pounds

Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade

110/120
120/130
110/120
120/130

IPS

[1]
EIPS
[2]
IPS
[1]
EIPS

[1]

3/16 0.07 600 - - -

1/4 0.11 1120 - 1000 1360

3/8 0.25 2440 3000 2240 3000

1/2 0.44 4240 5320 4080 5320

5/8 0.69 6270 8540 6320 8240

3/4 0.99 9680 11760 9040 11760

7/8 1.5 13080 15920 12320 15920

1 1.60 17040 20680 16120 20680

1 1/8 2.03 21280 26000 20000 26000

1 1/4 2.50 26760 31960 24880 31960

1 3/8 3.03 33080 38400 30400 38400

1 1/2 3.60 39200 45600 36760 45600


Notes:

1 Based on CSA G4-00

2 Based on Manufacturers’ Data; exceeds CSA G4-00

3 Individual manufacturers may produce ropes stronger than the minimum

figures as stated above.

Wire Rop e
131

Table 5-2

Working load limit for selected wire rope (kilograms)

Factor ofsafety = 5

Rope dia.
Weight
6x19 Class IWRC
6x37 Class IWRC

[mm]
[kg/m]
SWL in Pounds
SWL in Pounds

Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade

110/120
120/130
110/120
120/130

IPS

[1]
EIPS

[2]
IPS

[1]
EIPS
[1]

8 .27 910 1000 825 910

10 .42 1420 1565 1285 1420

12 .60 2060 2240 1855 2230

14 .82 27990 3080 2530 2795

16 1.07 3650 4015 3285 3650

18 1.35 4610 5075 4160 4610

20 1.67 5690 6580 5140 5690

22 2.02 6895 7585 6220 6895

24 2.41 8200 9035 7400 8200

28 3.30 11150 12300 10070 11180

32 4.30 14585 16500 645 14585

26 5.40 18440 20330 815 18440

132
Wire Rop e

5.2 Wire Rope Terminations

5.2.1 General Considerations

a Wire ropes may require end fittings. Factory made

terminations shall be used wherever possible. This

requirement is in place because the factory has the

capacity to load test such terminations to an

appropriate level (150-200% of the WLL is typical

among suppliers).

b Where terminations must be made, they shall be

made by a competent person, under controlled

conditions, using equipment designed for that

purpose. These terminations must not be

manufactured in the field, but rather in shops with

adequate equipment (e.g. Maintenance shops).

c Wire rope users shall be aware that each type of

fitting attached to a wire rope has a specific

efficiency rating. This can reduce the working load of

a rope assembly and shall be given due consideration

in determining the capacity of a wire rope system.

Termination strength is expressed as a percentage of

the strength of the rope. The strength ranges from

100% in the case of a Spelter Socket, 85% for a

clipped eye. Consult Engineering for direction.

d In replacing a termination, duplicate the existing one

whenever possible as not all terminations are suitable

for all applications. The crane or rope manufacturer’s

end fitting specifications shall be followed when

making a wire rope termination.

e In cutting any wire rope, special care should be taken

to seize the rope ends to prevent unlaying of the

wires and slippage of the core of IWRC and rotation-

resistant rope.
Wire Rop e
133

5.2.2 Swaged Fitting and Spelter Socket

a With swaged fittings, a rope is inserted into the

fitting bore and the fitting is then swaged onto the

rope. This method is used for buttons, threaded

studs, open and closed sockets, and to attach a load

hook directly onto a rope. This method can be used

with nearly all rope constructions and produces a

high efficiency bond.

b Spelter sockets have traditionally been used when

determining the actual breaking strength of ropes.

Other end terminations are compared to the strength

efficiency of spelter sockets, which is considered

100% of the actual rope strength.

5.2.3 Hand Splice

OHSA Construction Regulations no longer allow hand

spliced end termination on a wire rope which is used in a

crane or hoisting application, unless performed by the

manufacturer. A hand splice shall not be made on the Bruce

Power site. Any existing hand tucked splices may continue

to be used, as long as they pass the annual inspection for

the device they are attached to. Users should look for loose

serving wire, and signs of the tucks pulling out.

5.2.4 Flemish Eye Splice for Six-Strand

Wire Rope

a A flemish eye splice shall be used with six-strand

wire rope only.

b The Flemish eye splice (rolled-in eye) is the most

reliable eye splice for shop use.

134
Wire Rop e

c The strength of a flemish eye splice depends largely

on friction developed between strands in the eye, and

the manner in which the splice is finished. (If finished

with a swaged sleeve or compression fitting, as

shown in Figure 5-6, allows for a higher breaking

strength of the rope).

Figure 5-6

Finishing a Flemish Eye Splice

(Reference: CAO Rigging Manual (1996), Fig. 1.74)

d A flemish eye splice shall be fitted with a swaged

steel sleeve. Flemish eye splices will develop an

efficiency of at least 90% of the specified breaking

strength of the rope.

e The preferred sizes for Flemish eyes are shown in

Table 5-3.

Table 5-3

Preferred Sizes for Flemish Eyes

Rope size Eye size

[in] [mm] [in x in] [mm x mm]

1/4 to 5/16 6 to 8 2 x4 50 x 100

3/8 to 1/2 10 to 12 3 x8 80 x 200

9/16 to 5/8 14 to 16 5 x 10 130 x 250

3/4 20 6 x 12 150 x 300


f Table 5-4 lists the recommended sleeves and die sizes

for their compression.

Wire Rop e
135

Table 5-4

Recommended Sleeves and Die Size

6x25 wire
Aluminum conduit
Die size for pressing

rope size
or IPS piping

5/16 3/8 x 1 1/2 5/8 hex.

3/8 1/2 x 1 1/2 3/4 hex.

7/16 3/4 x 2 7/8 hex.

1/2 1 x 2 1/4 1 3/16 hex.

5/8 1 x 2 1/4 1 3/16 hex.

3/4 1 1/4 x 3 1 5/8 hex. followed by 1 7/16 hex.


g A thimble should be used on a Flemish Eye where

practical. Where a thimble in a Flemish eye is used,

the dimensions of the eye will have to be modified,

usually by reducing it. Install the thimble when the

first overhand knot has been tied. It is impossible to

make the eye fit tight around the thimble. Elongate

the ferrule somewhat to extend over the throat, or

install a cable clip at the throat to close the wire rope

around the thimble.

5.2.5 Clipped Eye

Clipped eyes shall not be used for hoisting except as noted

in Section 9.0 Slings.

Clipped eyes shall not be employed for hoisting and sling

applications where a manufactured sling could be used.

136
Wire Rop e

5.3 Wire Rope Handling

5.3.1 Handling

Wire rope should be handled as follows:

a Wire rope reels should not be dropped.

b When lifting a reel of wire rope, a bar should be

placed through the reel and the reel lifted using slings

or jack stands.

c Wire rope should be stored on reels, clear of the

ground and protected from weather.

d If manufacturer’s lubrication is gone, a thin film of

light oil should be applied to deter rust.

e When unreeling or uncoiling wire rope from a reel or

coil, the reel or coil should rotate as the rope

unwinds to avoid reverse bending. The following

should be performed:

1 Pass a shaft through the reel and raise it

sufficiently to allow it to rotate freely.

2 Pull the end of the rope straight away from the

reel, maintaining sufficient tension to avoid

kinking the rope.

3 If the reel cannot be raised, the free end of the rope

may be held and the reel rolled along the ground.

Wire Rop e
137

Figure 5-7

Re-reeling Wire Rope

Reference: CSAO Rigging Manual (1996), Fig. 1.24

5.3.2 Winding Wire Rope on a Drum

When starting wire rope on a drum, the wire rope should be

attached at the correct location and the rope spooled evenly

so that the turns lie snugly against each other in even layers.

Improper winding on a drum will result in excessive wear,

usually concentrated in one or more places as the loaded

rope attempts to climb over the next wrap and piles up on

itself. To obtain good drum winding the rope must be

started from the proper flange and this will depend on

whether the rope leads from the top or bottom of the drum.

Standing behind the drum and facing it, the following

should be observed (refer to Figure 5-8 Starting Rope on a

Drum):

1 A right lay rope leading from the underside of the

drum should start winding at the right flange.

2 A right lay rope leading from the top side of the

drum should start winding at the left flange.

In use, there must always be at least three full turns of rope

on the drum.
138
Wire Rop e

Figure 5-8

Starting Rope on a Drum

Reference: CSAO Rigging manual (1996), Fig 1.26


Wire Rop e
139

5.3.3 Fleet Angle

The fleet angle is the angle between the centre of the first

sheave after the drum and the edge of the drum.

Figure 5-9

Fleet Angle
140
Wire Rop e

Too large a fleet angle may result in excessive rubbing of the

rope against the flanges of the sheave groove, or crushing

and abrasion of the rope on the drum. If the angle is too

small the rope will pile up against a flange of the drum.

Fleet angles should not exceed 1 1/2° for smooth drums or

2° for grooved drums. A fleet angle of 1 1/2° represents a

distance of 38 feet for each foot of drum width from the

centre line to the flange. When the fleet angle is 2°, the

distance is 29 feet for each foot of drum width from the

centre line to the flange. The same proportions apply to

metric measurements.

Any time the fleet angle exceeds 2°, consult Engineering for

guidance and approval.

Wire Rop e
141

5.4 Use of Wire Rope for Cranes

5.4.1 Application

a The use of wire rope must meet the requirements of

OHSA and the regulations for construction projects.

(Refer to the most recent revision.)

b OHSA Regulation 168 (refer to the most recent

revision).

1 A cable used by a crane or similar hoisting device:

• shall be steel wire rope of the type, size, grade and

construction recommended by the manufacturer

of the crane or similar hoisting device

• shall be compatible with the sheaves and the

drum of the crane or similar hoisting device

• shall be lubricated to prevent corrosion and wear

• shall not be spliced

• shall have its end connections securely fastened

and shall be kept with at least three full turns on

the drum

2 No cable used by a crane or similar hoisting

device:

i subject to subsection (3), shall contain six

randomly distributed wires that are broken in

one rope lay or three or more wires that are

broken in one strand in a rope lay; for rotation

resistant ropes 4 randomly distributed broken

wires in one lay, or 2 broken wires in 1 strand in

1 lay

142
Wire Rop e

ii shall be smaller than its nominal rope diameter

by more than

• 1 mm for a diameter up to and including 19 mm

• 2 mm for a diameter greater than 19 mm up to

and including 29 mm

• 3 mm for a diameter greater than 29 mm

iii shall be worn by more than one-third of the

original diameter of its outside individual wires

iv shall show evidence of kinking, bird-caging,

corrosion or other damage resulting in non-

recoverable distortion of the rope structure

(distortion of the rope structure is caused by the

lays shifting, for various reasons, relative to one

another)

v shall show evidence of possible rope failure

including rope damage caused by contact with

electricity

3 No cable that is static or is used for pendants:

• shall contain three or more broken wires in one

lay or in a section between end connectors

• shall have more than one broken wire at an end

connector

4 Rotation-resistant wire rope shall not be used for a

cable for boom hoist reeving and pendants.

5 Rotation-resistant wire rope shall not be used

where an inner wire or strand for a cable is

damaged or broken.

Wire Rop e
143

c OHSA Regulation 169 (refer to the most recent revision)

A cable used by a crane or similar hoisting device

shall be capable of supporting at least:

• three and one-half times the maximum load to

which it is likely to be subjected if it is used on a

device other than a tower crane and it winds on a

drum or passes over a sheave

• five times the maximum load to which it is likely

to be subjected if it is used on a tower crane and it

winds on a drum or passes over a sheave

• three times the maximum load to which it is likely

to be subjected if it is a pendant or is not subject to

winding or bending

• ten times the maximum load to which it is likely to

be subjected if the crane or similar hoisting device

is used for supporting persons

d OHSA Regulation 170 (refer to the most recent

revision):

1 All cable used by a crane or similar hoisting device

shall be visually inspected by a competent worker

at least once a week when the crane or similar

hoisting device is being used.

2 The worker performing an inspection shall record

the condition of the rope or cable inspected in the

log book for the crane or similar hoisting device.

e Inspection criteria for the visual inspection of wire

rope may be found in Bruce Power Procedure

BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment.

144
Wire Rop e

5.4.2 Wire Rope Fittings for Cranes

a Refer to the latest revision of OHSA Regulation 171:

1 A cable used by a crane or similar hoisting device

shall be securely attached:

• by binding and fastening the cable around an

oval thimble in a way that is strong enough to

prevent the cable thimble from separating

• by fastening the cable within either a tapered

socket by means of virgin zinc or a wedge-type

socket fitted with a wire rope clip at the dead

end to prevent the accidental release or loosening

of the wedge

2 The dead end cable of a wedge socket assembly on

a hoisting line shall extend between 100

millimeters and 300 millimeters out of the socket.

b Refer to the latest revision of OHSA Regulation 175:

1 An overhauling weight used on the cable of a crane

or similar hoisting device:

• shall be prevented from sliding up or down the

cable

• shall be securely attached to the load hook and

the cable

2 No overhauling weight used on the cable of a

crane or similar hoisting device shall be split.

Wire Rop e
145

5.5 Pre-Use Inspection

5.5.1 Pre-Use Inspections

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

a Pre-use inspections shall be completed by the

operator and shall consist of a visual inspection of all

load hoist rope, all boom hoist rope, and all trolley

rope that can reasonably be expected to be in use

during intended operation.

• Particular attention shall be paid to the rope at

points of attachment to the hoist and points of

rapid deterioration, such as flange points,

crossover points, and repetitive pickup points on

the drum.

• Pre-use inspection results shall be recorded in the

crane log.

• If in doubt, the operator shall notify the Supervisor

of Lift and log findings and follow lock out

procedures.

b Wire rope shall be visually inspected before use

considering the following:

1 Shock Load:

• a sudden force or load can cause internal and

external damage (bird caging)

• there is no practical way to estimate the force

applied by shock loading a rope

• sudden release of a load can also damage a wire

rope

146
Wire Rop e

Figure 5-10

Bird Caging From Shock Loading

Courtesy OPG

2 Broken Wires:

• all wire rope removal and replacement criteria are

based on fatigue wire breaks located at the crown

of a strand

• if six or more randomly distributed wires in one

lay are broken, or three or more wires in one

strand in one rope lay, the rope shall be replaced

• broken wires close to an attached fitting may

indicate localized fatigue (the rope shall be

replaced)

• wire rope shall be removed from service if a single

valley wire break is detected

3 Removal Criteria for Static Ropes and Pendants:

• three broken wires in one lay or in a section

between end connectors

• more than one broken wire at an end termination

• an internal break indicated by an externally

protruding wire or loop of loose wires as shown in

Figure 5-11 Wire Fractures at Core/Strand

Interface
Wire Rop e
147

4 Removal Criteria for Rotation-Resistant Ropes:

(Close inspection of spin-resistant and rotation-

resistant wire rope is necessary because of their

susceptibility to damage. These ropes may

deteriorate from the inside out.)

• four randomly distributed broken wires in one

lay

• two broken wires in one strand in one lay

• localized core deterioration

• one outer wire broken at the contact point with

the core of the rope indicated by an externally

protruding wire or loop of loose wires (refer to

Figure 5-11)

Figure 5-11

Wire Fractures at Core/Strand Interface

5 Worn or Abraded Wires:

Outer wire rope wear that appears to exceed one-

third of the outer wire diameter due to friction on

sheaves, rollers, drums etc.

6 Reduction in Rope:

The outside appearance of a used rope should be

compared with an unused portion of the rope (e.g.,

on the drum).
148
Wire Rop e

7 Stretch:

If lay is visibly longer, especially accompanied by a

reduction in diameter.

8 Corrosion:

Rusting of wire rope or fittings.

9 Distortion:

Kinked, birdcaged, crushed, flattened or jammed

strands or other damage which distorts rope

structure (wires or strands that are pushed out of

their original position in the rope).

Figure 5-12

Examples of Wire Rope Adverse Conditions

Table 5-4

Nominal Size vs. Maximum Reduction in Diameter

Hoisting and Rigging Handbook

Wire Rope Hoisting and Rigging Handbook

Nominal size Maximum reduction

Inch mm Inch mm

up to 3/4 19 3/64 1

7/8 to 1-1/18 20 - 29 1/16 2

1-1/4 to 1-1/2 30 - 38 3/32 3

Wire Rop e
149

10 Insufficient Lubrication:

If a cable appears dry.

11 Heat or Electric Arc Damage:

Heat damage or signs of contact with high voltage

lines.

12 Accumulation of Defects:

In the judgment of the operator, creates an unsafe

condition.

When wire rope is wound on a drum, it should bend the

same way as when on the reel to avoid a reverse bend in the

rope. Always re-reel wire rope from the top of one reel to

the top of another, or from the bottom of one reel to the

bottom of another, as shown in Figure 5-7 Re-Reeling Rope

on a Drum.

150
Wire Rop e

6.0 Fibre Rope

6.1 General

6.2 Properties and Construction

6.3 Whipping

6.4 Knots, Bends and Hitches

6.4.1 Figure Eight Knot

6.4.2 Double Sheet Bend

6.4.3 Locking Bowline

6.4.4 Figure of Eight Loop

6.4.5 Half-S

6.4.6 S Bend

6.5 Handling, Care and Use

6.5.1 Uncoiling and Coiling

6.5.2 Rope Care

6.5.3 Kinks and Hockles

6.5.4 Overloading

6.5.5 Ultra-Violet Light or Ionizing Radiation

Degradation

6.5.6 Electrical Degradation

6.5.7 Heat

6.6 Pre-Use Inspection

Fibre Rope
151

6.1 General

This section provides general information regarding care

and use of fibre rope, and describes fibre rope properties,

construction, and pre-use inspection criteria. Knowledge of

ropes and tying knots assists activities such as:

• securing objects temporarily to fixed support

• use of tag lines

• hand hoisting light objects such as hand tools and

larger rigging

• reeving a wire rope

152
Fibre Rope

6.2 Properties and Construction

Synthetic fibre rope, such as nylon, polypropylene and

polyester (Dacron) are the only ropes used in Bruce Power.

a Properties of synthetic fibre ropes are as follows:

• resistant to rot, mildew and fungus growth

• good resistance to chemicals and shock loading

• nylon rope absorbs little moisture, but when wet,

loses about 10 percent strength

• nylon ropes do not stiffen when wet, do not freeze,

and hold knots well

• nylon ropes have good dielectric properties when

clean and dry

• braided and double braided nylon ropes are good

choices for general use

• polypropylene rope is stiffer and does not hold

some knots well

• polypropylene rope has about 60 percent of the

strength of nylon

• polypropylene rope floats and its strength is

unaffected by water

• polypropylene rope degrades from exposure to

ultraviolet light or ionizing radiation

b Polypropylene rope shall not be used for overhead

lifting due to possible degradation from ultraviolet

light or ionizing radiation.

c When tying knots, bends or hitches, care shall be

taken when joining synthetic ropes of different

materials and construction.

Fibre Rope
153

d Rope strength and amount of stretch under load

depends on the rope material and construction (refer

to Table 6-2 Working Load Limits for Fibre Ropes).

Table 6-1

Characteristics of Various Materials and Constructions

Fibre Construction Relative strength

Nylon Twisted 100%

Single braid 120%

Double braid 125%

Plaited 100-115%

Polyester Twisted 80-95%

Single braid n/a

Double braid 125%

Plaited 135%

Polypropylene Twisted 60-70%

Single braid 80%

Double braid 80%

Plaited n/a

Aramid Twisted (4 strand) > 200%

Double braid 350%

PP/PE* Double braid 85%

154
Fibre Rope

Table 6-2

Working Load Limit for Fiber Ropes

(Varies widely by Manufacturer)

Rope
three-strand
Braided
3-stand
Nylon
Polyester
Kernmantle

Dia.
poly-
poly-
nylon
braid
braid

(in)
propylene
propylene

3/8 560 670 960 1200 1420

1/2 970 1150 1660 2500 2100

5/8 1680 1870 3400 3640 2730

3/4 2080 2490 4200 4800 -

1 3520 4200 6800 8600 -

1 1/4 5300 6340 10600 13100 -


Note:

1. It is important to note that the above stated strength figures do

not take into account dynamic load effects.

Fibre Rope
155

6.3 Whipping

Whenever a fibre rope is cut, the rope ends should be heat

fused or whipped to prevent the rope from untwisting or

fraying. If the strands slip in relation to each other, one or

two strands will assume a greater share of the load, which

will result in shortened rope life and reduce its capacity

(refer to Figure 6-1 Whipping Fibre Rope Ends).

a A back splice is an excellent rope termination

provided it does not have to pass through a block.

b Tape should not be used for whipping rope ends

except for temporary measure.

Figure 6-1

Whipping Fibre Rope Ends

(Reference: CSAO Rigging Manual (1996), Fig. 2.12)

156
Fibre Rope

6.4 Knots, Bends and Hitches

Fibre rope, unlike wire rope, does not need a permanent end

fitting other than the appropriate form of whipping, in

order to be used. A fibre rope may be attached to an object,

or joined to itself by some form of knot.

a The strength of a rope is reduced by a knot, bend or

hitch. The efficiencies noted below are for new rope

and are only approximate. When tying knots in

synthetic rope, tails should be left at least 15 cm (6

inches) long. Common knots used in the rigging

industry are discussed in this section.

b In addition to being a generic term, “Knots”

generally refer to a stopper (such as a figure of eight

or overhand) or a loop (such as the various

bowlines). “Bends” are used to join two ropes

together (“S”- bend). Efficiency of knots and bends is

50-60% of rope strength. “Hitches” are used to

attach a rope to a pole (clove hitch, constrictor) or

ring (anchor bend, round turn and two half hitches).

Efficiency of hitches is approx 75%.

Note

These efficiencies are approximations only and vary

widely by the quality of the knot, bend or hitch.

c The knots presented in this handbook are known to

hold well in synthetic fibre ropes when tied properly.

Fibre Rope
157

Working End
Standing Part

Overhand Loop

Bight

Figure 6-2

Terms Commonly Associated With Knot Tying

6.4.1 Figure Eight Knot

(Efficiency: 50%, refer to Figure 6-3 Figure Eight Knot)

• Generally used at the end of a rope to temporarily

prevent strands from unlaying.

• Figure eight knots are useful in preventing a rope end

from slipping through a block.

• A figure eight knot should be tied in the end of a tag

line as a hand hold.

Figure 6-3

Figure Eight Knot

158
Fibre Rope

6.4.2 Double Sheet Bend

(Efficiency: 50%, refer to Figure 6-4 Double Sheet Bend)

• If ropes are new, the double sheet bend may be

unreliable under repeated loading.

• The double sheet bend is used for joining ropes end-

to-end and works well with ropes of different sizes.

Figure 6-4

Double Sheet Bend

6.4.3 Locking Bowline Knot

This knot forms a non-slipping loop that is easy to untie.

The addition of the extra “locking” loop makes it hold in

stiff or slippery rope.

front

Figure 6-5

Locking Bowline Knot

Fibre Rope
159

6.4.4 Figure of Eight Loop Knot

This knot is easy to tie, and will not slip, even in

polypropylene rope. Form a bight at least twice as long as

the loop you want. Form an overhand loop in the bight, and

take the free end behind the standing part, and back

through the loop from the top. Adjust the size of the loop to

suit, and draw the knot tight.

Figure 6-6

Figure Eight Loop Knot

6.4.5 Half-S Knot

The Half-S is a slip knot that will hold well in synthetic

rope. Take a bight around the object to be secured (ring,

pole, etc.). Take the working end of the rope and make four

overhand loops around both parts of the rope. Pass the free

end through all the loops, and ease the knot tight. This knot

replaces the Slipknot and Running Bowline.

Figure 6-7

Half-S Knot
160
Fibre Rope

6.4.6 S-Bend Knot

This bend is essentially two Half-S knots tied over the two

standing parts to be joined, and then drawn together. Lay

the two rope ends parallel. Wrap one working end four

times around itself and the other rope. Pass the working end

through the loops and draw tight. Repeat with the other

working end. Pull the two knots together. This knot replaces

the Fisherman’s Bend and the Sheet Bend.

Figure 6-8

S-Bend Knot

Fibre Rope
161

6.5 Handling, Care and Use

Synthetic fibre ropes require care and maintenance, like

other rigging components. Exposure to various hazards

including dirt, water, radiation, heat, and electric fields can

cause deficiencies ranging from loss of strength to

catastrophic failure. Ropes should be periodically inspected

while in use for signs of degradation, wear or other defects.

Defective ropes shall be destroyed before discarding them to

prevent somebody else from using them.

6.5.1 Uncoiling and Coiling

a A new coil of three-strand rope should be laid flat

with the inside end of the rope at the bottom. The

inside end of the rope should be taken up through

the centre of the coil (refer to Figure 6-9 Uncoiling

New Rope).

b When coiling used rope by hand, it should be coiled

in a clockwise direction. When uncoiling, it should be

unwound counter-clockwise.

c Braided rope, having no lay, does not lend itself

easily to coiling. It may be held or laid down in

figure 8’s, stored on reels or in bins (refer to Figure

6-10 Storing Braided Rope).

Figure 6-9 Figure 6-10

Uncoiling New Rope Storing Braided Rope

162
Fibre Rope

6.5.2 Rope Care

All ropes are subject to weakening due to dirt and grit

becoming embedded in them. Ropes may be cleaned in cool

fresh water with a non-detergent soap and dried in air,

protected from UV rays.

a Rope shall not be overloaded.

b Ropes shall not be dragged over ground or over

another rope under tension.

c Softeners shall be used to pack sharp corners when

hand lifting materials.

d Rope should be reversed end-for-end occasionally to

spread wear.

e Shock loading shall be avoided.

f Rope should be stored to prevent physical damage,

and in a range of -30°C to 80°C.

g Ropes shall be kept away from excessive heat and

from chemicals, acids, strong alkalis, paint, fumes

and exhaust gas.

h Ropes shall not be subjected to a sustained load

equal to its rated capacity for more than 3 days.

i 1/2” ropes are recommended for use as tag lines or

hand lines in hoisting operations; however, 3/8” rope

may be used for light or fragile loads. Ropes less than

1/2” are hard to handle and difficult to secure knots.

Nylon rope shall not be used as a tag line due to its

excessive stretch properties.

Fibre Rope
163

6.5.3 Kinks and Hockles

Three-strand rope that has been heavily loaded and

permitted to rotate may develop kinks when it relaxes (refer

to Figure 6-19 Kink in Rope). If kinks develop, they shall be

removed with care, if they are simply pulled out, the rope

will hockle (refer to Figure 6-20 Hockle in Rope).

• a rope shall be destroyed if it hockles

• braided and double braided ropes can kink if twisted,

but do not hockle

Figure 6-19 Figure 6-20

Kink in Rope Hockle in Rope

6.5.4 Overloading

Values in Table 6-2 Working Load Limits of Synthetic Fibre

Rope, allows for a design factor of five. Rope that has been

overloaded shall be removed from service. Overloaded rope

may be recognized by:

• reduced diameter

• unnaturally long lay

• presence of kinks or hockles

164
Fibre Rope

6.5.5 Ultra-Violet Light or

Ionizing Radiation Degradation

Polypropylene rope (and to a lesser extent nylon ropes) are

subject to degradation due to exposure to UV radiation.

They shall not be used for overhead hoisting due to the

following:

• the filaments degrade and weaken with exposure to

sunlight or ionizing radiation

• ultra-violet rays may cause the outer filaments to

fade and become brittle

Polypropylene ropes tend to become discolored, stiff and

show broken outer fibers when UV radiation degradation

occurs. Such ropes must be discarded, since their strength

cannot be relied upon, and they are subject to catastrophic

failure.

6.5.6 Electrical Degradation

Current may flow along the surface of a synthetic rope if it

is wet and left in a strong electric field which may generate

heat and melt fibres. Such rope shall be discarded

immediately.

This condition may be recognized by:

• loss of flexibility

• local glazing

• fusing of surface fibres

• worm holes in the rope

Fibre Rope
165

6.5.7 Heat

Synthetic ropes are thermoplastic, melt at fairly low

temperatures and shall not be used when:

• excessive heat or friction sufficient to melt fibres may

be encountered

• near welding operations

• temperatures exceeding 80°C (180°F) or hot pipes

may be touched

6.6 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

166
Fibre Rope

7.0 Chain

7.1 General

7.2 Grades

7.3 Chain Fittings

7.4 Handling Use and Storage

7.5 Pre-Use Inspection

Chain
167

7.1 General

a General advantages and disadvantages of chain:

1 Advantages

More suitable for some applications because it:

• withstands rough handling

• does not kink

• is easily stored

• is flexible

• excessive deterioration due to stretch, interlink

wear, abrasive action or corrosion is relatively

easy to detect

2 Disadvantages

• steel coil chain is considerably heavier than wire

rope of equal breaking strength

• minor deterioration due to stretch, interlink

wear, abrasive action or corrosion could be

difficult to measure

• may permanently lose strength if heated to over

800° F

168
Chain

b The three main applications for chains in Bruce

Power are chain slings, chain for chain hoists, and

tie-down chains for shipping large objects.

1 ASME B30.9, “Slings” requires a design factor for

chain slings of 4-1, while the Construction Safety

Association of Ontario (CSAO) requires a 5-1

design factor to ensure it is equal to all other

rigging hardware. Since Bruce Power has industrial

and construction projects on the same sites, CSAO

guidelines shall be followed to ensure compliance.

When ordering a chain sling, a 5-1 design factor

shall be specified.

2 Alloy chains shall not be used at temperatures

greater than 500° F (260° C).

3 All welding repairs and heat treating shall be done

by the manufacturer.

4 All chains will have a temporary loss of strength at

temperatures above 400°F (204°C). Consult

Engineering for any application at temperatures in

excess of 400°F (204°C).

Chain
169

7.2 Grades

7.2.1 Grades

There are several grades of chain available for specific

applications. Chain is identified by grade number and a

special marking by the chain manufacturer.

7.2.2 Classifications

a Chain in use at Bruce Power comes under one of four

classifications:

1 Alloy Chain: Grade 80 or 100 alloy chain is the

only chain approved for normal overhead lifting

and tie-downs. In order to be able to be used for

overhead lifting, they shall be marked with grade

and manufacturer's markings.

2 Proof Coil Chain: Grade 30, 46 or 70 chain. It

must not be used for overhead lifting.

3 Stainless Steel Chain: Similar construction to Alloy

chain and it may be used for overhead lifting,

typically in applications that require immersion in

water, exposure to temperatures above 800°F

(425°C) or that are in an otherwise harsh

environment. Note that Stainless Steel chain has

just over half the strength of Grade 80 Alloy chain

of the same (identical) size. It may be used at

temperatures of up to 1600F (870C) without

permanent loss of strength.

4 Hand Chain: Proof Coil chain (often modified to

suit the application) that has been case-hardened

for use as the “power” for a manual chainfall. It

shall not be used for overhead lifting.

170
Chain

b Grade 80 chain is identified by 8, 80, or 800

embossed on its links at regular intervals, (refer to

Figure 7-1 Grade 80 Chain Link).

Figure 7-1

Grade 80 Chain Link

c Grade 100 is identified by a 10 embossed on the link

and is 20% stronger than Grade 80.

d Chain marked with only a letter “A” (alloy) shall not

be used for hoisting.

e Chains not identified by means of metal tags or

marking on links shall not be used for hoisting

(except unmarked chain fall or lever hoist chain

supplied by the hoist manufacturer).

f Chain-hoist chain shall be procured from the hoist

manufacturer as it is case-hardened. This chain shall

not be used in place of alloy steel load chains used

for slings and tie-downs.

g Chains can be procured with an optional protective

coating for use in hostile environments to protect the

chain from corrosion.

Chain
171

Table 7-1

Specifications for Chain used at Bruce Power

Factor ofsafety

Nominal
Working load limit
Max. length of 100 links
Approximate

size
[lb]
[in]*
weight of

100ft [lb]

Grade 80 Grade 100 Grade 80 Grade 100

7/32 1680 2160 75 75 50

9/32 2800 3440 90 90 72

5/16 3600 4650 100 100 114

3/8 5680 7040 125 125 148

1/2 9600 12000 164 164 243

5/8 14480 18080 202 202 351

3/4 22640 28240 252 252 584

7/8 37360 34160 277 277 705


Note* Physical dimensions of Grade 80 and Grade 100 chain are identical. Be

sure to check the identifying marks.

172
Chain

7.3 Chain Fittings

a Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear links, mechanical

coupling links, or other attachments shall have a

Working Load Limit (WLL) equal to or greater than

that of the alloy chain with which it is used. The

fittings to be used with alloy chain must come

embossed with the alloy Grade 80 or a rating equal

to that of the chain.

b Standard attachments shall be of a size recommended

by the chain manufacturer.

c Makeshift fasteners, hooks, or links shall not be

used.

Chain
173

7.4 Handling, Use and Storage

• Hoisting chain shall not be overloaded.

• The WLL decreases with decreasing hoisting angle.

• When a chain sling is hooked back on itself to form a

choker the WLL is reduced by 20%.

• Chain shall not be crossed, twisted or knotted.

Manufacturer’s shortener shall be used.

• A hook shall not be placed through a link in the

chain body, a master link shall be used.

• Chain shall be protected with suitable packing when

bent over sharp corners or edges.

• Chain shall not be dragged from under loads or over

obstacles.

• Chain slings shall not be dropped from heights.

• Chain shall be stored in a clean dry place.

• Chain shall not be used when the links are locked.

• Chain shall not be spliced by inserting a bolt between

two links.

• Chain links shall not be hammered to straighten.

• Site personnel shall not repair chain, only the chain

manufacturer may repair a chain.

• Snatch or sudden loading shall be avoided, especially

in extreme cold weather.

• Chain subjected to shock or impact load, shall be

quarantined until inspected.

• Attachments and fittings shall be of a type, size and

material suitable for service with the chain.

174
Chain

• Chain shall not be heated during flame cutting or

welding of other objects. Heating a chain affects the

chain’s heat treatment characteristics and drastically

reduces it’s WLL.

• When purchased as a bridle, the WLL shall be

marked on the sling identification tag and is based on

all sling legs being attached to the load. When

assembled on site, bridle sling WLL shall be based on

two sling legs carrying the load.

Chain
175

7.5 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria. Chain shall be inspected link-by-

link before use for the following (refer to Figure 7-2 Chain

Inspection):

• Periodic Inspection identification

• link damage (cracked links or excessive wear)

• gouges, chips or cuts

• weld splatter

• severe corrosion or

pitting

• discoloration due to

exposure to heat

• link wear: Using

calipers, measure the

reduced diameter at

the point of maximum

wear (replace chain if

reduction is >10%)

• elongated (stretched),

bent or twisted links:

Compare a length of

chain with an equal

number of links of new

chain (if stretch

exceeds 3 percent

replace the chain)

Figure 7-2

Chain Inspection

176
Chain

8.0 Fittings and Hardware

8.1 General

8.2 Hooks

8.2.1 General

8.2.2 Pre-Use Inspection

8.3 Wire Rope Thimbles

8.3.1 General

8.3.2 Pre-Use Inspection

8.4 Links

8.4.1 General

8.4.2 Pre-Use Inspection

8.5 Shackles

8.5.1 General

8.5.2 Pre-Use Inspection

8.5.3 Shackle Installation

8.6 Eyebolts

8.6.1 General

8.6.2 Pre-Use Inspection

8.7 Swivel Hoist Rings

8.7.1 General

8.7.2 Side Pull Swivel Hoist Ring

8.7.3 Pre-Use Inspection

8.8 Lifting Eye Nuts

8.8.1 General

8.8.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Fittings a nd Hardware
177

8.9 Lifting Turnbuckle

8.9.1 General

8.9.2 Pre-Use Inspection

8.10 Swivels

8.10.1 General

8.10.2 Pre-Use Inspection

178
Fittings and Hardwa re

8.1 General

This section provides guidance for the proper selection, pre-

use inspection requirements, and safe use of common

rigging fittings and hardware.

a Bruce Power's policy for minor rigging and lifting

fittings and hardware is "Crosby Only". This

includes shackles, eyebolts, links and eyenuts. In

situations where a Crosby manufactured item is not

available, other manufacturer's may be used,

providing the following conditions are met:

1 They satisfy current Occupational Health and

Safety Act (OHSA) requirements.

2 They comply with a standard issued by a

competent authority such as ANSI / ASME, CSA,

ASTM, or any of the various industry associations.

3 The proposed use has been reviewed and accepted

by the Responsible System Engineer.

4 They are entered in the Tool Management System.

b Any equipment found to be defective for any reason

must be immediately removed from service. The

Supervisor of the Lift is responsible for ensuring that:

1 The defective equipment is tagged as defective.

2 If it is repairable, it must be sent to the appropriate

repair location or sent off site for repairs.

3 If it is not repairable, it must be destroyed prior to

being discarded;

4 A replacement shall be ordered to replace the

defective item.

Fittings a nd Hardware
179

c The WLL of any fitting or piece of hardware shall

not be exceeded.

d Fittings not listed herein may be used if they satisfy

current Occupational Health and Safety Act (OHSA)

requirements, they comply with a lifting device

standard issued by a competent authority such as

ANSI / ASME, CSA, ASTM, or any of the various

Industry Associations; they are in compliance with

company purchasing policies (e.g. manufacturer); the

proposed use has been reviewed and approved by the

Responsible System Engineer.

e Storage for rigging equipment shall be provided in

accordance with manufacturer or site engineering

recommendations. As a minimum, storage locations

shall be established in areas where equipment is

protected from mechanical damage, excessive heat,

sparks, vibration, moisture and acid fumes.

f The load rating of fittings used in a sling leg shall be

equal to, or exceed the load rating of the sling to

which the fitting is attached.

g Fittings for slings shall not be welded.

h All lifting equipment, regardless of function or

capacity requires an annual inspection and a pre-use

inspection.

180
Fittings and Hardwa re

8.2 Hooks

8.2.1 General

a Hooks shall meet or exceed the requirements listed in

ASME B30.10, Hooks.

b Manufacturer’s identification shall be forged or die

stamped on a low stress, non-wearing area of the

hook.

c Lifting hooks shall be equipped with a safety latch.

Requests to deviate from this requirement shall be

referred to site engineering.

NOTE

A safety latch may not be needed for unhooking a load

underwater (e.g. irradiated fuel bay). Consult

Engineering. Safety latches are also not required on

double saddle duplex hooks (Turbine Hall) if both sides

are loaded equally.

d Self-locking hooks shall be locked during use.

e Hooks shall not be used if the throat opening has

increased, or if the hook latch fails to close.

f Duplex (sister) hooks shall be loaded equally on both

sides, unless the hook is specifically designed for

single loading. When using an articulated duplex

hook, care should be taken as articulation of the

hook may cause load instability.

g Hooks shall not be repaired, altered, reworked or

reshaped by welding, heating, burning or bending.

h Hooks worn beyond manufacturer’s limits in typical

wear areas shall not be used.

i Eye hooks, shank hooks and swivel hooks are

designed to be used with wire rope or chain.


Fittings a nd Hardware
181

j When using synthetic slings, a web sling hook should

be used. They are used to connect synthetic web and

round slings. The hook eye is designed with a wide

beam surface to eliminate bunching effects.

k Hooks shall not be side loaded, back loaded or tip

loaded. The load capacity of a hook is reduced by

50% at it’s tip (refer to Figure 8-1 Hooking onto Lugs)

Figure 8-1

Hooking onto Lugs

l Loads shall be supported entirely by a hook. The

latch shall not support any part of the load. Proper

hook engagement shall be visually verified (refer to

Figure 8-2 Sling Hooking).

Figure 8-2

Sling Hooking

182
Fittings and Hardwa re

m A load shall be kept within the middle 90° of a hook

saddle, to a maximum of 45° on either side of centre

(refer to Figure 8-5 Sling Positioning). A master link

or shackle can be used to ensure that the load angle

does not exceed a 90° included angle (45° on each

side).

NOTE

Working Load Limits for hooks are based on a load being

supported vertically in the saddle. As the angle from

vertical increases, the WLL Diminishes.

Table 8-1

Alloy Steel Eye Hook WLL 1-60 Mg

Crosby
WLL Dimensions (inches) Weight

designation
Mg Tons B E
(lbs)

D 1 1.1 0.75 0.89 0.61

F 1-1/2 1.7 0.91 0.91 0.89

G 2 2.2 1.13 1 1.44

H 3 3.3 1.25 1.09 2.07

I 5 5.5 1.56 1.36 4.3

J 7 7.7 2 1.61 8.3

K 11 12.1 2.44 2.08 15

L 15 16.5 2.84 2.27 21.6

N 22 24.3 3.5 3.02 39.5

O 30 33.1 3.5 3.25 60

P 37 40.8 4.5 3 105

S 45 49.6 4.94 3.38 148

T 60 66.1 5.69 4.12 228

Fittings a nd Hardware
183

Figure 8-3

Sling Hook

Reference: Crosby Catalogue

Table 8-2

Sling Hook

Chain Size Working Load Limit Weight each Dimensions (in.)

(in.) lbs kg (lbs.) B E G

9/32 (1/4) 3500 1550 .81 .56 1.44 .90

3/8 7100 3200 2.1 .75 1.78 1.25

1/2 12000 5400 3.71 .94 2.12 1.55

5/8 18100 8200 6.40 1.15 2.41 1.88

3/4 28300 12800 9.80 1.34 2.69 2.16

7/8 34200 15500 15.40 1.44 3.06 2.45

184
Fittings and Hardwa re

Design factor = 4

Figure 8-4

Grab Hook

Reference: Crosby Catalogue

Table 8-3

Grab Hook

Chain Size Working Load Limit Weight each Dimensions (in.)

(in.) lbs kg (lbs.) B E H

9/32 (1/4) 3500 1550 0.6 0.559 0.91 0.38

3/8 7100 3200 1.2 0.8 1.16 0.5

1/2 12000 5400 3 0.98 1.69 0.63

3/4 28300 12800 8.25 1.36 2.19 0.88

7/8 34200 15500 11.9 1.55 2.56 1.06

Fittings a nd Hardware
185

ISO Design Factor = 4

Figure 8-5

Sling Positioning

n A hook shall not support more than two sling legs, a

shackle or master link may be used to suspend a

multi-leg sling (refer to Figure 8-6 Multiple Sling

Attachment).

Figure 8-6

Multiple Sling Attachment

186
Fittings and Hardwa re

8.2.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Hooks shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• cracks, nicks, wear, gouges and deformation

• operation of safety latch

• hook swivels freely

• hook attachment and securing means

• increased throat opening

• bending, twisting or distortion

• self-locking hooks for proper operation and locking

Figure 8-7

Hook Inspection Areas


Fittings a nd Hardware
187

8.3 Wire Rope Thimbles

8.3.1 General

Thimbles should be used in the eyes of slings wherever

possible as they increase the strength of the eye and reduce

the wear.

• Thimbles should be used to connect shackles, bolts,

hooks, etc to wire rope.

• Thimbles reduce wear in the eye of a sling.

• A constant D/d ratio is maintained by use of thimbles.

• Since thimble eyes are too small to use in a choker

hitch, thimbles are not used on all slings.

• Proper size “slip on” thimbles shall be used for a

given wire size.

• When ordering thimbles, “extra heavy” should be

specified (Figure 8-6 Wire Rope Thimbles).

• Thimbles are subject to wear and deformation due to

contact loads. This is normal and does not interfere

with their purpose.

Figure 8-8

Wire Rope Thimbles


188
Fittings and Hardwa re

Table 8-4

Heavy Duty Thimble

Rope dia. (in.) Weight


Dimensions (in.)

per 100
Overall
Inside
Overall
Inside
Width of

(lbs.)
length
length
width
width
score

* 1/4 6.50 2.19 1.62 1.50 .88 .41

* 5/16 11.80 2.50 1.88 1.81 1.06 .50

* 3/8 21.60 2.88 2.12 2.12 1.12 .63

7/16 34.70 3.25 2.38 2.38 1.25 .72

* 1/2 - 9/16 51.00 3.62 2.75 2.75 1.50 .89

* 5/8 75.70 4.25 3.25 3.12 1.75 1.00

* 3/4 158.10 5.00 3.75 3.81 2.00 1.22

7/8 177.80 5.50 4.25 4.25 2.25 1.38

1 313.90 6.12 4.50 4.75 2.50 1.56

1-1/8 - 1-1/4 400.00 7.00 5.12 5.88 2.88 1.81

1-1/4 - 1-3/8 811.00 9.08 6.50 6.81 3.50 2.19

1-3/8 - 1-1/2 1294.80 9.00 6.25 7.12 3.50 2.56

1-5/8 1700.00 11.25 8.00 8.12 4.00 2.72

1-3/4 1775.00 12.19 9.00 8.50 4.50 2.84

1-7/8 - 2 2775.00 15.12 12.00 10.38 6.00 3.09

2-1/4 3950.00 17.50 14.00 11.88 7.00 3.62


Notes:

1. Data taken from an older Crosby Catalogue.

Fittings a nd Hardware
189

8.3.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Thimbles shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• proper fit in the sling eye

• deformation such as bends or twists

• extreme wear

190
Fittings and Hardwa re

8.4 Links

8.4.1 General

Links fall under the "Crosby Only" policy at Bruce Power.

Only Crosby Links shall be used.

a Only alloy steel fittings shall be used.

b Links symmetrically loaded, with a maximum

included angle of 120° may be used to full WLL.

c WLL is specified on an identification tag attached to

fittings by the manufacturer and is based on equal

load distribution between all sling legs. WLL on tag

is for all sling legs attached.

1 For multi-leg slings assembled on site, the WLL

shall be based on two sling legs carrying the load.

2 When purchasing multi-leg slings, the WLL for the

entire sling assembly shall be specified.

d Links are manufactured in different configurations

(refer to Figure 8-9 Links).

Figure 8-9

Links

Fittings a nd Hardware
191

Table 8-6

Pear Shaped Link

Design Factor = 6

Stock
Dimensions (in.) Working load Weight

diameter
each

(in.)
Outside length Outside width
lbs. Kg.
(lbs.)

(large end)

3/8 3.00 2.25 1800 800 .23

1/2 4.00 3 2900 1300 .55

5/8 5.00 3.75 4200 1900 1.06

3/4 6.00 4.5 6000 2700 1.88

7/8 7.00 5.25 8300 3760 2.75

1 8.00 6 10800 4900 4.35

1 1/4 10.25 7.5 16750 7600 7.60

1 3/8 11.00 8.25 20500 9300 11.30


Notes:

1. Data taken from an older Crosby Catalogue. Refer to current

manufacturer’s data where available.

192
Fittings and Hardwa re

Table 8-7

Alloy Master Link

Design Factor = 6

Size “A” Working load limit Weight each Dimensions (in.)

(in.) lbs kg (lbs.) Inside width Inside length

1/2 7000 3150 .82 2.50 5.00

5/8 9000 4050 1.52 3.00 6.00

3/4 12300 5550 2.07 2.75 5.50

7/8 15000 6800 3.50 3.75 6.38

1 24360 11050 4.85 3.50 7.00

1-1/4 36200 16400 9.57 4.38 8.75

1-1/2 54300 24600 16.22 5.25 10.50

1-3/4 84900 38500 25.22 6.00 12.00

2 102600 46500 37.04 7.00 14.00

2-1/4 143100 64900 54.10 8.00 16.00

2-1/2 160000 72550 67.75 8.00 16.00

2-3/4 216900 98350 87.70 9.50 16.00

3 228000 103400 115.00 9.00 18.00

3-1/4 262200 118900 145.00 10.00 20.00

3-1/2 279000 126550 200.00 12.00 24.00

3-3/4 336000 152400 198.00 10.00 20.00

4 373000 169150 228.00 10.00 20.00

4-1/4 354000 160550 302.00 12.00 24.00

4-1/2 360000 163250 345.00 14.00 28.00

4-3/4 389000 176400 436.00 14.00 28.00

5 395000 179150 516.00 15.00 30.00


Notes:

1. Data taken from an older Crosby Catalogue. Refer to current

manufacturer’s data where available.

Fittings a nd Hardware
193

Table 8-8

Master Link Assembly

Design Factor = 3.5

* Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Based on 60 degree

included angle or smaller. For included angles greater than 60 degrees, the

Working Load Limit must be de-rated.

“A”
Working load limit (lbs)* Weight
Dimensions (in.)

size
each

(in.) Based on
Based on
(lbs.) B C D E F

Grade 8
5:1 Design

chain (4:1)
factor

3/4 9100 12300 3.40 2.75 5.50 .56 1.75 3.35

1 18400 24360 7.40 3.50 7.00 .69 2.36 3.94

1-1/4 31200 36200 15.90 4.38 8.75 .88 3.54 6.30

1-1/2 47000 54300 28.10 5.25 10.50 1.13 3.94 7.09

1-3/4 73500 84900 46.00 6.00 12.00 1.38 5.00 8.00

2 88900 102600 67.00 7.00 14.00 1.50 5.75 9.00

2-1/2 123900 160000 142.00 8.00 16.00 2.00 7.00 14.00

2-3/4 188000 216900 196.0 9.50 16.00 2.25 8.00 16.00

4 373000 403.4 10.00 20.00 2.75 9.50 16.00


Notes:

1. Data taken from an older Crosby Catalogue.

2. Load values for sling angle 60° or more.

3. Be sure to specify Grade 80 Alloy fittings.

Figure 8-10

Connecting Link

Reference: Crosby Catalogue

194
Fittings and Hardwa re

Table 8-9

Connecting Link

Design Factor = 4

Chain Size Weight


Working
Working
Dimensions (in.)

Each
Load Limit
Load Limit

(in.) (mm) (lbs.)


(lbs.)
(kg.)
A B D

9/32 (1/4) 7 0.28 4300 1950 0.36 1.88 0.78

5/16 8 0.33 5700 2585 0.36 2.18 0.91

3/8 10 0.73 8800 3992 0.45 2.53 1.03

1/2 13 1.67 15000 6804 0.64 3.44 1.44

5/8 16 2.86 22600 10251 0.75 4.13 1.73

3/4 20 5 35300 16012 0.93 4.92 2.03

7/8 22 7.5 42700 19368 1.06 5.46 2.27

1 25 11.03 59700 27079 1.22 5.98 2.44

1-1/4 32 20.38 90400 41005 1.5 7.43 3.07


Notes:

1. Data taken from an older Crosby catalogue.

2. Always be sure to specify alloy, Grade 80 or equal.

8.4.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Links shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• rated WLL is equal to or greater than the attached

sling

• manufacturer’s markings

• deformation (bends, twists, nicks, gouges, cracks or

wear)

Fittings a nd Hardware
195

8.5 SHACKLES

8.5.1 General

a Shackles in use at Bruce Power follow the "Crosby

Only" policy.

b All Crosby shackles are now rated in Metric Tonnes

(Mg). This is denoted by the rating having units

written as “t”. There still may be older stock in

place, and it is important to be aware of the load

rating of the component you are using.

For example:

• 12T = 12 short tons = 24000lb

• 12t = 12000kg = 26455lb

c Shackles or links should be used when connecting

more than two sling eyes to a hook.

d The WLL, size and manufacturer’s mark shall be

embossed on the shackle body.

e Shackles shall be sized to the full WLL of the sling,

not just the load being lifted.

f Shackle diameter should be equal to or greater than

the wire rope diameter.

g Shackle pin and body parts should be kept together

and stored as a set.

h Screw pin and bolt type shackles are available in

anchor or chain style, in both screw pin and bolt

types.

196
Fittings and Hardwa re

i In-line shackle loading shall be applied perpendicular

to the pin. Screw pin and bolt type shackles may be

angle loaded, but loads should be applied in the

plane of the bow. When angle loaded, screw pin and

bolt type shackle WLL shall be reduced in

accordance with Figure 8-14 Shackle Angle Loading.

j Inadequate pin diameter and the folding, bunching or

pinching of synthetic web or round slings reduces the

rated load significantly. Slings shall not be constricted

or bunched between the ears of a clevis or shackle or

in a hook (refer to Figure 8-11 Bunching and

Pinching).

Figure 8-11

Bunching and Pinching

k Shackles shall be of the proper shape and size to

ensure slings seat properly.

l The following shackles may be found at Bruce Power:

1 Screw Pin Shackles: The pin is fastened by means

of a threaded portion that mates with the shackle.

Fittings a nd Hardware
197

2 Bolt Type Shackles: Bolt type shackles may be used

for any application where screw pin shackles are

used, but are recommended for permanent or long

term installations, or where a load may slide on the

shackle pin causing the pin to rotate. The pin is a

specially made bolt that is held in place by a nut

and cotter pin. The cotter pin must always be fitted

as well as the nut.

3 Alloy Shackles: Alloy shackles are available in

Screw Pin or Bolt types. They are exactly the same

size as regular shackles, but their WLL is about

50% higher. Alloy shackles should be kept separate

from regular shackles and added to the tool

management system. High strength forged alloy

steel shackles used for specialty applications, shall

also have the letter “A” embossed on the pin and

shackle body.

4 Web Sling Shackles: Web sling shackles are

designed to connect synthetic web slings and

synthetic round slings to eyebolts and lifting lugs

(refer to Figure 8-12 Round Sling and Figure 8-13

Web Sling Shackles). The wider bow area increases

load distribution, allowing for 100% of a sling’s

WLL to be used.

Figure 8-12

Round Sling Shackles


198
Fittings and Hardwa re

Figure 8-13

Web Sling Shackles

Angle loads must


In-Line 100% Rated Load

be applied in the

plane of the bow. 45 degrees

70% Rated Load

90 degrees

50% Rated Load

Side Loading Reduction Chart

For Screw Pin and Bolt Type Shackles Only

Angles of Side Load

from Vertical In-Line of Shackle Adjusted Working Load Limit

0 degrees from In-Line 100% of Rated Working Load Limit

45 degrees from In-Line 70% of Rated Working Load Limit

90 degrees from In-Line 50% of Rated Working Load Limit

Figure 8-14

Shackle Angle Loading

m Loading of bolt type and screw pin shackles shall not

exceed 120° included angle.

n Shackles symmetrically loaded with two sling legs

having a maximum included angle of 120° may be

used to the full WLL (refer to Figure 8-15 Maximum

Shackle Angle Loading).

Fittings a nd Hardware
199

120°

Maximum

LOAD

Figure 8-15

Maximum Shackle Angle Loading

Courtesy ofCrosby

200
Fittings and Hardwa re

Table 8-11

Crosby 2005 Screw Pin Shackles

Design Factor 6

Nominal Size
Working Load Limit Stock Number Weight Each

in inches
Tons Pounds G-209 S-209
in pounds

3/16 1/3 666 1018357 ***** 0.06

1/4 1/2 1,000 1018375 1018384 0.10

5/16 3/4 1,500 1018393 1018400 0.19

3/8 1 2,000 1018419 1018428 0.31

7/16 1-1/2 3,000 1018437 1018446 0.38

1/2 2 4,000 1018455 1018464 0.72

5/8 3-1/4 6,500 1018473 1018482 1.37

3/4 4-3/4 9,500 1018491 1018507 2.35

7/8 6-1/2 13,000 1018516 1018525 3.62

1 8-1/2 17,000 1018534 1018543 5.03

1-1/8 9-1/2 19,000 1018552 1018561 7.41

1-1/4 12 24,000 1018570 1018589 9.50

1-3/8 13-1/2 27,000 1018598 1018605 13.53

1-1/2 17 34,000 1018614 1018623 17.20

1-3/4 25 50,000 1018632 1018641 27.78

2 35 70,000 1018650 1018669 45.00

2-1/2 55 110,000 1018678 1018687 85.75


Note:

1. WLLs in this table are applicable to Crosby Shackles only

Fittings a nd Hardware
201

Table 8-12

Crosby 2009 Synthetic Round or Web Sling Shackles

Round
Working Load Limit Web Slings Stock
Weight

Sling
Tons Pounds Webbing
Eye
Ply
Number
Each

Size
Width
Width
S-281
in

Number
Inches
Inches
pounds

1 and 2 3-1/4 6,500 2 2 2 1021048 0.06

3 4-1/2 9,000 3 1.5 2 1021057 0.10

4 6-1/4 12,500 4 2 2 1021066 0.19

5 and 6 8-1/2 17,000 6 3 2 1021075 0.31

8.5.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Shackles shall be inspected before use for the following:

(refer to Figure 8-16 Shackle Inspection).

• Periodic Inspection identification

• WLL and manufacturer’s markings on the shackle

body

• bends or twists in the body

• no more than 10% wear in the pin or bow section

• inside width at the pin has not increased (if the pin

does not screw into the shackle properly, the shackle

may have been overloaded)

202
Fittings and Hardwa re

Figure 8-16

Shackle Inspection

8.5.3 Shackle Installation

a A shackle pin shall be centred in a hook to prevent

side loading of the shackle.

b When a shackle is attached to a pad eye, the pad eye

width shall be 80% or more of the inside width of

the shackle at the pin.

c Shackles should be oriented such that the hook is in

contact with the pin, not the bow.

d When using more than one sling, the shackle pin

shall be placed in the hook, since the bow is designed

to carry more than one sling leg.

e If a shackle is used in a choker hitch, or in a two

ends down hitch, the shackle should be positioned on

the sling or hook to prevent pin rotation.

Figure 8-17

Shackle Use
Fittings a nd Hardware
203

8.6 Eyebolts

8.6.1 General

a Eyebolts in use at Bruce Power follow the "Crosby

Only" policy.

b Only shoulder type eyebolts are approved for use at

Bruce Power. "Regular" nut eyebolts require

Engineering approval for use. Machinery-type

eyenuts may be installed in a blind hole tapped at

least 1-1/2 diameters deep.

c Eyebolts shall not be welded.

d When installed, the eyebolt shoulder shall be at right

angles to the axis of a tapped hole, and be in full

contact with the working surface.

1 Eyebolts shall not be undercut to seat the shoulder

against a load.

2 Receiving holes should be counter sunk or washers

should be used to seat the shoulder.

e Loads shall be applied in the plane of the eye to

prevent side loading, ensuring the bolt does not bend.

Eyebolts may be shimmed to orient the eye, and shall

remain in firm contact with the shim and working

surface, (refer to Table 8-13 Eyebolt Shimming and

Figure 8-18 Eyebolt Installation). Eyebolts shall not

be over tightened.

f Where washers or spacers are used to correct the

orientation of eyebolts, a minimum of 1 1/4

diameters of thread engagement shall be obtained.

204
Fittings and Hardwa re

Figure 8-18

Eyebolt Installation

g Machined shoulder type eyebolts require a hole depth

equal to the shank length, plus one-half the nominal

eyebolt diameter.

h Minimum thread engagement shall be:

• 1 1/2 x diameter for steel, cast iron, brass and

bronze

• 2 x diameter for aluminum, zinc, magnesium or

plastic

i When using shoulder nut eyebolts, the threaded

shank shall protrude through the load sufficiently to

allow full thread engagement of the nut. If the

unthreaded section of the shank protrudes past the

load, washers shall be used to take up the excess

space between the nut and the load (refer to

Figure 8-19 Shoulder Nut Eyebolt).

Fittings a nd Hardware
205

Figure 8-19

Shoulder Nut Eyebolt

j Eyebolts installed with a retention nut shall have full

thread engagement. Retention nuts shall meet one of

the following standards to develop the WLL and

should be torqued to Society of Automotive

Engineers (SAE) Grade 8 bolt requirements:

• ASTM A563 Grade D Hex Thick

• ASTM A563 Grade DH Standard Hex

• ASTM A194 Grade 2H Heavy Hex

• SAE Grade 8 Standard Hex

k Eyebolt strength decreases rapidly with decreasing

sling angle. Angles less than 45° shall not be used

without engineering approval. Hoist rings may be

more suitable (refer to Section 8.7 Swivel Hoist Rings).

l Machine shoulder eyebolts are primarily intended to

be installed into tapped holes.

1 After the load on an eyebolt has been calculated,

the eyebolt size shall be selected.

2 Eyebolts should be screwed into a load until the

shoulder is secure against the load.


206
Fittings and Hardwa re

3 When flat washers are used as shims, hardened

washers such as grade F436 should be used since

other types of washers may crush and cause

eyebolt failure.

4 Table 8-13 Eyebolt Shimming may be used to

estimate shim thickness required to align eyebolts

with the sling line (based on Unified National

Course (UNC) threads).

Table 8-13

Eyebolt Shimming

Eye Bolt size (in) Shim Thickness Required to

Change Rotation 90° (in)

1/4 0.0125

5/16 0.0139

3/8 0.0156

1/2 0.0192

5/8 0.0227

3/4 0.0250

7/8 0.0278

1 0.0312

1-1/4 0.0357

1-1/2 0.0417

m It can not be assumed that because an eyebolt was

previously installed, that it can safely lift the load.

For example:

• Some equipment is fitted with eyebolts intended for

use during manufacturing or servicing individual

equipment components, but not for lifting the

entire assembly.

Fittings a nd Hardware
207

• Previously installed eyebolts may be suitable for a

vertical lift but may not have the capacity for a 60°

sling angle.

n Prior to use, eyebolt WLL shall be checked. (refer to

Table 8-14 Crosby 2005 S-279 Eyebolt Angular Load

Rating (Imperial))

o When lifting with a single vertical sling attached to

an eyebolt, a swivel with anti-friction bearings should

be used between the sling and eyebolt to prevent the

eyebolt from unscrewing. Alternately a tag line may

be used to prevent rotation.

p Values shown in the following tables are WLL for a

single eyebolt (not a pair).

• Table 8-14 Crosby 2005 S-279 Eyebolt Angular

Load Rating (Imperial)

• Table 8-15 Crosby 2005 S-279 Eyebolt Angular

Load Rating (Metric)

q Most eyebolts manufactured to ASTM A 489 are

rated for the temperature range of +30° F (-1°C) to

+275° F (135°C). Alloy steel eyebolts rated for use at

temperatures down to -40° F (-40° C) are marked

with the letter “A”.

r Eyebolts should be stored to prevent thread damage

(i.e. hanging rather than piled in bins).

WARNING

A 7/8” -9 UNC eyebolt may thread into a 1” -8 UNC

hole, but may fail when loaded.

s A thread gauge should be used to check thread size

when using a 7/8” eyebolt.


208
Fittings and Hardwa re

CAUTION

If a load is not stiff enough to resist compressive forces,

it may buckle. If a sling is passed through two eyebolts

and attached to a hook, the load and angle of loading on

the eyebolts will be altered.

t Care shall be exercised when attaching slings to

eyebolts. Use of a spreader beam will eliminate extra

tension from the sling angle (refer to Figure 8-20

Improper Attachments).

1 Two separate sling legs shall be used to attach

eyebolts to a hook.

2 After tension has been applied, the load should be

watched for signs of buckling.

Figure 8-20

Improper Attachments

u When eyebolts are used with a sling angle (not a

vertical lift), tension on sling legs increases.

Manufacturer specified WLL shall be reduced to

compensate for the additional load imposed on the

eyebolt due to increased sling tension.


Fittings a nd Hardware
209

v For angular lifts, eyebolts shall be selected as follows:

1 Sling angle shall be determined.

2 Sling leg tension shall be calculated (refer to

Section 9.0 Slings).

3 Eyebolt size shall be determined based on sling

angle and tension.

w Unlike sling tables for angular lifts which are based

on two slings carrying a load, eyebolt tables are

based on the WLL of a single eyebolt.

x “Blank” eyebolts and eyenuts are available to be

custom-machined to suit a particular applications.

Since the strength of the item will depend on the final

design, the capacity shall be added on a tag. A tool

number shall also be assigned.

y It is not permissible to shorten an eyebolt without the

approval of engineering. Such modified items shall

have a tool number and capacity tag.

z Engineering approval is required for use of Pad Eyes

on Bruce Power site.

210
Fittings and Hardwa re

Table 8-14

Crosby 2005 S-279 Eyebolt Angular Load Rating (Imperial)

Working Load Limit

Vertical Lift 60° Lift 45° Lift Less

Eyebolt
Than

Size
Tons Pounds Tons Pounds Tons Pounds
45°

1/4 x 1 0.33 650 0.21 420 0.10 195

5/16 x 1-1/8 0.60 1,200 0.39 780 0.18 360

0.78 1,550 0.50 1,00 0.23 465

Not Recommended

3/8 x 1-1/4
1/2 x 1-1/2 1.30 2,600 0.85 1,690 0.39 780

5/8 x 1-3/4 2.60 5,200 1.69 3,380 0.78 1,560

3/4 x 2 3.60 7,200 2.34 4,680 1.08 2,160

7/8 x 2-1/4 5.30 10,600 3.45 6,890 1.59 3,180

1 x 1-1/2 6.65 13,300 4.32 8,645 2.00 3,990

1-1/4 x 3 10.550 21,000 6.80 13,600 3.15 6,300

1-1/2 x 3-1/2 12.00 24,000 7.80 15,600 3.60 7,200


Note:

1. WLLs in this table are applicable to Crosby Eyebolts only

Fittings a nd Hardware
211

Table 8-15

Crosby 2005 S-279 Eyebolt Angular Load Rating (Metric)

Working Load Limit

Vertical Lift 60° Lift 45° Lift Less

Eyebolt

Size
Metric
Kilograms Metric
Kilograms Metric
Kilograms
Than

45°

Tons
Tons
Tons

M6 0.20 200 0.13 130 0.06 60

M8 0.40 400 0.26 260 0.12 120

Not Recommended

M10 0.64 640 0.416 416 0.192 192

M12 1.00 1,000 0.65 650 0.30 300

M16 1.80 1,800 1.17 1,170 0.54 540

M20 2.50 2,500 1.625 1,625 0.75 750

M24 4.00 4,000 2.60 2,600 1.20 1,200

M30 6.00 6,000 3.90 3,900 1.80 1,800

M36 8.50 8,500 5.525 5,525 2.55 2,550


Note:

1. WLLs in this table are applicable to Crosby Eyebolts only

212
Fittings and Hardwa re

8.6.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

a Eyebolts shall be inspected before use for the

following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• wear or damage

• bent or elongated eye or shank

• evidence of machining, grinding, welding or cutting

(after manufactured)

• eyebolt and mating hole threads are clean

b During visual inspection, if thread damage is

suspected in a hole into which an eye bolt is to be

installed, a go-no-go gauge for class 2 fit should be

used to check the threads.

c Threads on eyebolts, swivel hoist rings and eye nuts

shall not be repaired with a tap or die, since

removing material will reduce the WLL to an

unknown amount.

1 If threads are damaged, the fitting shall be

removed from service.

2 If internal threads on a load are damaged, site

engineering shall be consulted for an appropriate

repair procedure.

Fittings a nd Hardware
213

8.7 Swivel Hoist Rings

8.7.1 General

a Hoist rings in use at Bruce Power follow the “Crosby

only” policy.

b Hoist rings have two main advantages over eyebolts:

• hoist ring will swivel 360° thus eliminating side

loading on the hoist ring (shimming is not required

to ensure the lift is in the plane of the eye)

• hoist ring strength will not be affected by sling

angle, however increased sling tension due to

angular lifts will influence the selection of hoist

ring sizes

c When lifting on a sling angle, increased tension due

to the sling angle shall be calculated before selecting

the hoist ring size.

d A tapped hole for a hoist ring shall be square with

the mounting surface, to a minimum depth of the

threaded shank length, plus one-half the threaded

shank diameter.

e Spacers shall not be used between a bushing flange

and the mounting surface.

f Hoist rings shall be installed to the recommended

torque, ensuring the bushing flange meets the load

surface. Torque values are stamped on hoist rings and

may be found in manufacturer’s tables. Engineering

approval is required if hoist ring can not be torqued

to the recommended value.

214
Fittings and Hardwa re

g Swivel hoist rings installed with a retention nut shall

have full thread engagement of the nut. Retention

nuts shall meet one of the following standards to

develop WLL and should be torqued to SAE Grade 8

bolt requirements:

• ASTM A563 Grade D Hex Thick

• ASTM A563 Grade DH Standard Hex

• ASTM A194 Grade 2H Heavy Hex

• SAE Grade 8 Standard Hex

h Triangular bail hoist rings are not approved for use

at Bruce Power.

i Lifting devices shall be attached in such a manner as

to ensure free movement of the hoist ring bail with

no interference. A partial load should be applied

before checking for proper rotation and alignment

(refer to Figure 8-21 Swivel Hoisting Ring).

Figure 8-21

Swivel Hoisting Ring

Fittings a nd Hardware
215

j Table 8-16 Crosby 2005 HR-125 Swivel Hoist Rings

and Table 8-17 Crosby 2005 Swivel Hoist Rings to

Synthetic Round or Web Slings, list short and long

thread length bolts (the star * after size indicates a

longer shank length). Short thread length bolts are

designed for ferrous metal (i.e. steel, iron). Long

thread bolts are designed for soft metals (i.e.

aluminum), but may be used in ferrous metals.

k These tables are applicable to standard swivel hoist

rings and hoist rings for web slings. Chain sling

tables are not shown.

Table 8-16

Crosby 2005 HR-125 Swivel Hoist Rings

Nominal Size
Working Load Limit Bolt Torque in
Thread Projection

in inches
Tons Pounds
Foot Pounds
Length in Inches

5/16-18 x 1.50 0.4 800 7 0.59

3/8-16 x 1.50 0.5 1,000 12 0.59

1/2-13 x 2.00 1.25 2,500 2 0.71

1/2-13 x 2.50* 1.25 2,500 28 1.21

5/8-11 x 2.00 2 4,000 60 0.71

5/8-11 x 2.75* 2 4,000 60 1.46

3/4-10 x 2.25 2.5 5,000 100 0.96

3/4-10 x 2.75* 2.5 5,000 100 1.46

7/8-9 x 2.75 4 8,000 160 0.9

7/8-9 x 3.50* 4 8,000 160 1.65

1-8 x 3.00 5 10,000 230 1.15

1-8 x 4.00* 5 10,000 230 2.15

1 1/4-7 x 4.50 7.5 15,000 470 2.22

1 1/2-6 x 6.50 12 24,000 800 2.98

2 1/2-4 x 6.50 15 30,000 1,100 2.98


Note:

1. WLLs in this table are applicable to Crosby Swivel Host Rings only

2. The star* above indicates a longer bolt shank length for soft

metals such as aluminum.

216
Fittings and Hardwa re

Table 8-17

Crosby 2005 Swivel Hoist Rings

to Synthetic Round or Web Slings

Round
Working Load
Web Sings Torque
Bolt Size
Spool
Thread

Sling
Limit
ft lb
inches
Bolt &
Projection

Size
Nut
Length

Ton lb. Web


Eye
Ply

Number
Torque

Width
Width

ft lb

Inch
Inch

1&2 3.10 6,200 2 2 2 100 3/4-10x2.75 90 0.90

1 & 2* 3.10 6,200 2 2 2 100 3/4-10x3.5 90 1.65

3 4.45 8,900 3 1.5 2 230 1-8x3 110 1.15

3* 4.45 8,900 3 1.5 2 230 1-8x4 110 2.15

4 6.20 12,400 4 2 2 470 1 1/4-7x4.5 130 2.22


Note:

1. The star* above indicates a longer bolt shank length for soft

metals such as aluminum.

8.7.2 Side Pull Swivel Hoist Ring

a Side pull swivel hoist rings are designed to accept

standard fittings to facilitate wider slings and quick

attachment. In order to use the larger fittings, shackle

load ratings may be greater than that of the hoist

ring frame (refer to Figure 8-22 Side Pull Swivel

Hoist Rings).

b The WLL of a hoist ring frame shall not be exceeded.

c Hoist rings shall be free to rotate into normal operating

position, and shackles shall be aligned with the load as

shown in Figure 8-22(a). If the shackle is oriented as

shown in Figure 8-22 (d), the lift shall not be made.

d A partial load should be applied and proper rotation

and alignment of the shackle checked. There shall be

no interference between the load and shackle.

Fittings a nd Hardware
217

Figure 8-22

Side Pull Swivel Hoist Rings

8.7.3 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Hoist rings shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• bent or elongated bail

• free movement of the bail, which should pivot 180°

and swivel 360°

• corrosion, wear or damage

• all mating threads for proper fit, damage, cleanliness

and free of lubrication

• hoist ring bushing flange contacts work piece squarely

• previously installed hoist rings shall be checked for

proper torque

• no spacers or washers are used between the bushing

flange and mounting surface

• hoist rings shall align with slings


218
Fittings and Hardwa re

8.8 Lifting Eye Nuts

8.8.1 General

a Lifting eye nuts in use at Bruce Power follow the

"Crosby Only" policy.

b Lifting eye nuts shall be used for vertical lifts only. To

ensure full thread engagement into an eye nut, one

thread of the bolt or stud shall be showing through

the eye (refer to Table 8-18 Crosby 2005 Lifting Eye

Nuts).

c Thread type and size shall be checked to ensure they

match (i.e. UNC or UNF, class 2).

d Grade 5 (equivalent or better), bolts or studs, shall be

used to attach eye nuts.

e Eye nuts shall not be ground, welded or modified.

f Pipe hangers, weld-less eye nuts or C-clamps shall

not be used as lifting eye nuts.

g Heavy duty eye nuts are available from

manufacturers where required.

Fittings a nd Hardware
219

Table 8-18

Crosby 2005 Lifting Eye Nuts

Design factor = 5

Size Information Working Load Limit G-400


Weight

Size
Standard
Tons Pounds
Stock
Each in

Number
Tap Size
Number
Pounds

Inches

1 1/4 0.26 520 1090438 0.09

2 3/8 0.63 1,250 1090474 0.17

3A 1/2 1.13 2,250 1090517 0.28

4 5/8 1.80 3,600 1090535 0.60

5 3/4 2.60 5,200 1090553 1.00

6 7/8 3.60 7,200 1090571 1.65

7 1 5.00 10,000 1090599 2.69

8 1-1/4 7.75 15,500 1090633 3.87

9 1-3/8 9.25 18,500 1090651 5.00

10 1-1/2 11.25 22,500 1090679 6.78

11 2 20.00 40,000 1090697 14.60


Note:

1. WLLS in this table are applicable to Crosby Eye Nuts only.

2. Values of WLL for vertical pull only.

8.8.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Eye nuts shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• gross mechanical defects

• evidence of grinding, welding or modification

• thread condition

220
Fittings and Hardwa re

8.9 Lifting Turnbuckle

8.9.1 General

a Turnbuckle used for lifting and/or rigging on the

Bruce Power site fall under the “Crosby only” policy.

b Turnbuckle end fittings may be stub ends, hooks,

eyes, jaws, or any combination (refer to Figure 8-23

Turnbuckle).

c All Turnbuckle used for rigging shall be made of

forged alloy steel and the manufacturer’s name or

trademark and turnbuckle size shall be permanently

marked on the turnbuckle body.

d Turnbuckle size is determined by the diameter of the

threaded end fitting. The WLL of a turnbuckle is

determined by the weakest end fitting used (refer to

Table 8-19 Crosby Turnbuckle WLL).

e Turnbuckle may work loose in service, and therefore

should be secured with locking wire through the

body and around the end fittings.

f When adjusting a turnbuckle, a wrench on the hex

end of the body should be used rather than passing a

bar through the body which may damage the

turnbuckle.

g Turnbuckle should not be adjusted during the

performance of the lift. Any necessary adjustments

should be made with the load fully taken up during

the lift and hold stage only.

h Use of a turnbuckle with a hook attachment requires

engineering approval. Note that the hook does not

have a latch and that it has a significantly lower

capacity than the eye or jaw attachment.

Fittings a nd Hardware
221

i Turnbuckle eye and jaw ends should be used in sling

legs to adjust sling length. Hook ends may be used to

lash or brace a load.

Jaw and Eye

Hook and Eye


Figure 8-23

Turnbuckle

Reference: Crosby Catalogue

8.9.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Turnbuckle shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• gross mechanical defects

• thread condition

• bends, twists, gouges and wear

222
Fittings and Hardwa re

Table 8-19a

Crosby Turnbuckle Working Load Limits (WLL)

Thread Dia. &


Jaw & Jaw Jaw & Eye

Take Up
Working Load
Weight Each Working Load
Weight Each

Limit
Limit

(in.) (lbs.)* (lbs.) (lbs.)* (lbs.)

1/4 x 4 500 .37 500 .33

5/16 x 4-1/2 800 .56 800 .52

3/8 x 6 1200 .85 1200 .80

1/2 x 6 2200 1.82 2200 1.77

1/2 x 9 2200 2.29 2200 2.25

1/2 x 12 2200 2.71 2200 2.67

5/8 x 6 3500 3.21 3500 2.98

5/8 x 9 3500 3.95 3500 3.72

5/8 x 12 3500 4.58 3500 4.35

3/4 x 6 5200 4.80 5200 4.51

3/4 x 9 5200 5.85 5200 5.56

3/4 x 12 5200 6.72 5200 6.42

3/4 x 18 5200 8.45 5200 8.14

7/8 x 12 7200 9.37 7200 9.10

7/8 x 18 7200 11.8 7200 11.6

1 x6 10000 10.4 10000 10.0

1 x 12 10000 13.8 10000 13.4

1 x 18 10000 17.1 10000 16.7

1 x 24 10000 21.0 10000 20.6

1-1/4 x 12 15200 21.9 15200 20.9

1-1/4 x 18 15200 25.9 15200 24.8

1-1/4 x 24 15200 29.8 15200 28.8

1-1/2 x 12 21400 32.6 21400 30.6

1-1/2 x 18 21400 38.0 21400 36.0

1-1/2 x 24 21400 43.5 21400 41.5

1-3/4 x 18 28000 53.5 28000 52.1

1-3/4 x 24 28000 31.1 28000 59.7

2 x 24 37000 96.3 37000 89.9

2-1/2 x 24 60000 167 60000 158

2-3/4 x 24 75000 199 75000 187


* use of a hook attachment on a turnbuckle requires engineering approval

Fittings a nd Hardware
223

Table 8-19b

Crosby Turnbuckle Working Load Limits (WLL)

Thread Dia. &


Eye & Eye Hook & Eye * Hook & Hook *

Take Up
Working
Weight
Working
Weight
Working
Weight

Load Limit
Each
Load Limit
Each
Load Limit
Each

(in.) (lbs.)* (lbs.) (lbs.)* (lbs.) (lbs.)* (lbs.)

1/4 x 4 500 .29 400 .31 400 .33

5/16 x 4-1/2 800 .48 700 .50 700 .52

3/8 x 6 1200 .75 1000 .79 1000 .83

1/2 x 6 2200 1.72 1500 1.80 1500 1.88

1/2 x 9 2200 2.63 - - - -

1/2 x 12 3500 2.75 1500 2.70 1500 2.77

5/8 x 6 3500 4.12 2250 2.98 2250 3.21

5/8 x 9 5200 4.22 - - - -

5/8 x 12 5200 6.12 2250 4.35 2250 4.58

3/4 x 6 5200 7.83 3000 4.21 3000 4.20

3/4 x 9 7200 8.83 - - - -

3/4 x 12 7200 11.5 3000 6.52 3000 6.92

3/4 x 18 10000 9.62 3000 8.24 3000 8.65

7/8 x 12 10000 13.0 4000 9.34 4000 9.85

7/8 x 18 10000 16.3 - - - -

1 x6 10000 20.2 - - - -

1 x 12 15200 19.9 5000 13.9 5000 14.8

1 x 18 15200 28.8 - - - -

1 x 24 15200 27.8 - - - -

1-1/4 x 12 21400 28.7 - - - -

1-1/4 x 18 21400 34.1

1-1/4 x 24 21400 39.6

1-1/2 x 12 28000 50.7

1-1/2 x 18 28000 58.0

1-1/2 x 24 37000 83.5

1-3/4 x 18 30000 149

1-3/4 x 24 75000 174

2 x 24

2-1/2 x 24

2-3/4 x 24
* use of a hook attachment on a turnbuckle requires engineering approval

224
Fittings and Hardwa re

8.10 Swivels

8.10.1 General

a Swivels fall under the “Crosby only” policy at Bruce

Power.

b Swivels are positioning devices and are not intended

to rotate under load.

c Pipe hanger components shall not be used in place of

swivels.

d Where a shackle may twist and become eccentrically

loaded, a swivel should be used instead.

e Swivels shall not be ground, welded or modified.

f The proper swivel type should be selected for the

intended purpose (refer to Figure 8-24 Swivels and

Table 8-20 Crosby 2005 Swivels).

8.10.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Swivels shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• swivels freely

• gross mechanical damage

• evidence of grinding, welding or modification

• bends, twists or cracks

Fittings a nd Hardware
225

Figure 8-24

Swivels

Table 8-20

Crosby 2005 Swivels

Swivel Size
Working Load Limit Swivel Weight Each in Pounds

in Inches
Tons Pounds Regular Jaw Chain

1/4 0.43 850 0.21 0.21 0.13

5/16 0.63 1,250 0.39 0.34 0.25

3/8 1.25 2,500 0.71 0.66 0.54

1/2 1.80 3,600 1.32 1.34 1.12

5/8 2.60 5,200 2.49 2.48 2.09

3/4 3.60 7,200 4.02 3.88 3.09

7/8 5.00 10,000 6.25 5.87 - - -

1 6.25 12,500 8.95 9.84 - - -

1-1/4 9.00 18,000 16.37 15.75 - - -

1-1/2 22.60 45,200 45.79 54.75 ---


Note:

1. WLLs in this table are applicable to Crosby Swivels only.

226
Fittings and Hardwa re

9.0 Slings

9.1 General

9.2 Operating Practices for All Slings

9.2.1 Calculating Sling Length/Headroom

9.3 Centre of Gravity,

Sling Angle and Sling Tension

9.3.1 Centre of Gravity

9.3.2 Sling Angle

9.3.3 Sling Tension

9.3.3.1 Load Weight Distribution

9.3.3.2 Sling Tension

9.3.3.3 Drifting Loads

9.3.3.4 Field Tension Check

9.4 Wire Rope Slings

9.4.1 General

9.4.2 Wire Rope Sling Strength

Reduction Due To Bending

9.4.3 Wire Rope Sling Examples

9.4.4 Wire Rope Grommet

9.4.5 Pre-Use Inspection

9.5 Synthetic Slings

9.5.1 General

9.5.2 Synthetic Round Slings

9.5.3 Corner Softeners and Wear Pads

9.5.4 Synthetic Sling Operating Practices

9.5.5 Pre-Use Inspection

Slings
227

9.6 Chain Slings

9.6.1 General

9.6.2 Pre-Use Inspection

9.7 Fibre Rope Slings

9.8 Multiple Leg Slings

228
Slings

9.1 General

a A sling is an assembly of wire rope, synthetic

material or chain used to secure a load to a lifting

hook or other device. Slings require special attention

as they may be inadvertently subjected to severe

wear, abrasion, impact loading, crushing and

overloading.

b Slings shall be checked for Periodic Inspection

identification such as colour coding or tags. If out of

date, slings shall not be used.

c If a sling does not pass pre-use inspection, it shall be

removed from service.

d ASME B30.9 is the basic standard for slings in use at

Bruce Power. Among its requirements is that all slings

carry the following basic information:

• capacity, including units for the types of hitches

used

• manufacturer’s name

• number of legs if greater than one

• diameter

• in addition, Chain and Synthetic slings shall also

bear:

1 length (reach)

2 material or chain grade

3 a unique identifier

Slings
229

e Slings shall have sufficient capacity for the imposed

load. Three things shall be determined:

• load weight

• how load weight is distributed around the load’s

Centre of Gravity (C of G)

• sling tension

230
Slings

9.2 Operating Practices for All Slings

a Refer to individual sling sections for additional

operating practices applicable to wire rope, chain, or

synthetic slings.

b Rated sling capacity shall not be exceeded.

c Manufacturer’s sling charts should be used to

determine sling Working Load Limit (WLL) at a

given sling angle. If sling chart is unavailable, tension

in each leg shall be calculated before selecting a sling.

d Shock loading, side loading and angular loading

adversely affects sling strength, and may cause a sling

to be overloaded. Sudden stops and starts should be

avoided as they will increase the stresses on the

slings.

e Loads shall be centred in the base or saddle of hooks

to prevent hook tip loading.

f Slings should not be constricted, bunched, or pinched

by a load, hook or any fitting.

g Slings shall be shortened or adjusted only by methods

approved by the sling manufacturer or a qualified

person. Slings shall not be shortened or lengthened

by knotting or twisting.

h Slings shall be hitched in a manner providing load

control.

i Sharp edges should be covered with approved

softeners of sufficient strength to protect the sling.

j Slings should not be pulled from under a load when

the load is resting on the sling.

k Slings should not be dragged on floors or over

abrasive surfaces.
Slings
231

l Slings should be suspended for storage.

m Slings shall be repaired, and re-certified by the

manufacturer. Slings shall not be repaired in the field.

n When a sling is removed from service, fittings shall

not be reused.

o Slings shall not be tightened by striking with a

hammer or other object.

p Sling used in a choker or basket arrangement must

have the load balanced at two points to prevent

slippage.

q The size of fittings, such as shackles, eyebolts and

slings shall be selected to match the load.

r Slings shall not be shock loaded, dropped, driven

over or have loads dropped on them.

9.2.1 Calculating Sling Length/Headroom

The Pythagorean Theorem can be used to calculate usable

sling length and available headroom. Knowing two sides of

a right triangle makes it possible to calculate the third side.

a = available headroom

b = distance from attachment to C of G

c = usable sling length

232
Slings

Figure 9-1

Calculating Sling Length/Headroom

Slings
233

9.3 Centre of Gravity, Sling Angle

and Sling Tension

In Bruce Power (consistent with North American sling

standards), sling angle is measured from the horizontal

plane while at other locations sling angle may be measured

from the vertical.

WARNING

This section is based on rigging attachment points on

the same horizontal plane. If calculations are performed

using formulae from this section where rigging

attachment points are not on the same horizontal plane,

inaccurate sling tension values will result which may

lead to overloading a sling and a dropped load accident.

CAUTION

The following section deals with calculations associated

with lifting and rigging. Because even a small error has

the potential to lead to serious consequences, it is

important that calculations be verified as outlined in

Section 3.0, Rigging and Lifting Practices.

9.3.1 Centre of Gravity

a Location of the load C of G is an important

consideration. Off centre loads can severely alter

sling tension.

1 If the C of G is not centred, it will affect tension in

each sling.

2 If sling legs of equal lengths are used with an

uncentered C of G, the load will tilt when lifted.

3 C of G may be found by supplier information and

calculation.

4 If in doubt about the location of the C of G,

contact engineering.

234
Slings

b The Centre of Gravity of off-centre loads may be

calculated using the calculator available on the

maintenance intranet site, or by performing the

following:

1 Weigh each end of the items being lifted.

2 Add the two weights together to get the total

weight of the lift.

3 Determine the total distance between the lift

points. This is the total distance.

4 Use the percentage of weight to determine the

distance from the opposite end to the C of G.

Example:

(refer to Figure 9-2 Determining the Centre of Gravity of a

Non-Uniform Object)

C of G from B

1 Weight of End A + Weight of End B

= Total Weight of Lift

500 + 1500 = 2000

2 Weight of End A divided by Total Weight

= per cent of Weight of End A

500 ÷ 2000 = 0.25 = 25%

3 Per cent of Weight at End A

x Total Distance between lift points

= Distance from Lift Point B to C of G.

0.25 x 20ft = 5ft.

Slings
235

Follow this process on the other two sides of the load.

Then, intersect the two C of G’s to find the

combined C of G.

C of G from B

1 Weight of End B + Weight of End A

= Total Weight of Lift

1500 + 500 = 2000

2 Weight of End B divided by Total Weight

= per cent of Weight of End B

1500 ÷ 2000 = 0.75 = 75%

3 Per cent of Weight at End B

x Total Distance between lift points

= Distance from Lift Point A to C of G.

0.75 x 20ft = 15 ft

Figure 9-2

Determining the Centre of Gravity of a

Non-Uniform Object
236
Slings

c On loads that have obvious uniform sections, the

combined C of G can be determined by calculating

the size and weight of each section and its C of G.

Note: Uniform sections will have Centered C of Gs.

1 Measure the distance (TD) between the C of G-1

and C of G-2.

2 Calculate the weight of each section.

3 To determine the combined C of G, divide the

weight of one of the sections by the total weight

(TW) of the combined sections; then multiply by

total distance (TD). The resultant will be the

distance from the combined C of G to the C of G

of the opposite section of the load.

Example:

(refer to Figure 9-3 Determining the Centre of Gravity on

Non-Uniform Loads with Uniform Sections)

C of G from C of G-1: Wt. C of G-2 ÷ TW x TD

4000 ÷ 10000 x 20 = 8 ft

C of G from C of G-2 Wt. C of G-1 ÷ TW x TD

6000 ÷ 10000 x 20 = 12 ft

Slings
237

Figure 9-3

Determining the Centre of Gravity on

Non-Uniform Loads with Uniform Sections

9.3.2 Sling Angle

In Bruce Power, consistent with North American sling

standards, sling angle is measured from the horizontal plane.

(refer to Figure 9-4 Sling Angle from Horizontal Plane)

60° is Bruce Power

preferred angle

Figure 9-4

Sling Angle from Horizontal Plane

238
Slings

a Sling angles less than 45° shall only be used with

engineering approval.

b Sling angles may be estimated by one of the following

processes:

1 When the slings are the same length by comparing

the length of the slings to the distance between the

attachment points (refer to Figure 9-5, Estimating

Sling Angle).

• When the sling legs are the same length as the

distance between the attachment points, the sling

angle will be 60 degrees.

• When the sling legs are longer than the distance

between attachment points, the sling angle will

be greater than 60 degrees.

• When the sling legs are shorter than the distance

between the attachment points, the sling angle

will be less than 60 degrees.

Slings
239

Figure 9-5

Estimating Sling Angle

2 Sling angle may be calculated when any two of the

following measurements are known as shown in

Figure 9-6 Dimensions.

• (L) Length of Sling

• (S) Spread between attachment points on load

• (H) Height between hook and load

240
Slings

Figure 9-6

Dimensions

Table 9-1 Sling Angle Determination, provides values and

formulae for sling angle calculations:

For example: Determine sling angle if

spread between attachment points = 18 and

sling length = 25

• value in Table 9-1 Sling Angle Determination

= S ÷ L

• S ÷ L = 18 ÷ 25 = 0.72

• 0.72 is between values of 0.52 and 1.00 in

Table 7-1, column S + L

• therefore sling angle is between 60° and 75°, lower

sling angle of 60° shall be used

Slings
241

Table 9-1

Sling Angle Determination

Sling Angle Degrees H+L S+L H + S

75 0.97 0.52 1.87

60 0.87 1.00 0.87

45 0.71 1.41 0.50

30 0.50 1.73 0.29


3 Sling angle may be estimated using an angle gauge

pattern illustrated in Figure 9-7 Sling Angle Gauge. A

copy of this gauge is also found on the back cover of

this handbook.

Figure 9-7

Sling Angle Gauge

242
Slings

9.3.3 Sling Tension

WARNING

This section is based on rigging attachment points on

the same horizontal plane. If calculations are performed

using formulae from this section where rigging

attachment points are not on the same horizontal plane,

inaccurate sling tension values will result which may

lead to overloading a sling and a dropped load accident.

If rigging attachment points for irregular shaped objects are

not on the same horizontal plane, and sling tension

calculations are required, site engineering should be

consulted.

Figure 9-8

Horizontal Plane

a Slings shall have sufficient capacity for the imposed

load. Three things shall be determined:

1 load weight

2 how the load weight is distributed around the

load’s Centre of Gravity

3 sling tension

Slings
243

9.3.3.1 Load Weight Distribution

a When lifting points are on the same plane and the

load is symmetrical, and lift points are equal distance

from the C of G, the Load Weight Distribution can

be calculated by dividing the weight of the load by

the number of legs to determine the share of the load

(NOTE: In a multiple sling leg setup, 2 legs are

assumed to bear 50% of the load each – refer to

Section 9.8 Multiple Leg Slings).

Load Weight Distribution (LWD)

= Wt ÷ # legs

= 10,000 lb ÷ 2 = 5,000 lb

Figure 9-9

Calculating Share of Loads – Symmetrical Loads

b When lifting asymmetrical loads, the Load Weight

Distribution can be calculated by the following

formula:

LWD – A: D2 x WT ÷ TD = Load Weight Distribution for A

4 ft x 10,000 lb ÷ 10 ft = 4,000 lb

LWD – B: D1 x WT ÷ TD = Load Weight Distribution for B

6 ft x 10,000 lb ÷ 10 ft = 6,000lb
244
Slings

Figure 9-10

Calculating Share of Loads – Uneven Loads

9.3.3.2 Sling Tension

a Sling tension is dependent on sling angle.

1 As sling angle decreases, sling tension increases.

For example, a 1,000 lb lift made with two vertical

slings (90° sling angle) each sling leg will have 500

lb tension. The same lift made with 30° sling angle

will result in sling tension of 1,000 lb in each leg.

2 Tension increases rapidly at low sling angles. For

example, an error of 5° at 30° will increase tension

by almost 20% as shown in Figure 9-11 Sling

Tension vs. Sling Angle.

Example:

• A load of 2,000 lbs., shared by two slings, can result

in higher forces in each individual sling leg than their

1,000 lb. share of the load. The loading on each leg

is doubled when loaded at 30°.

Slings
245

Figure 9-11

Sling Tension vs. Sling Angle

b Load Angle Multipliers

• Load Angle Multipliers are used in determining the

load carried at an angle to the load.

• When the angle of loading is known, the sling

tensions can be calculated by using the Load Angle

Multipliers shown in Table 9-2.

• Determine the share of the load the sling is

responsible for and then multiply its share of the

load by the angle of loading multiplier.

246
Slings

Table 9-2

Load Angle Multipliers

Horizontal Angle Load Angle Multiplier

90 1.00

85 1.004

80 1.015

75 1.035

70 1.064

65 1.103

60 1.154

55 1.220

50 1.305

45 1.414

The angles below may only be used with engineering approval

40 1.555

35 1.743

30 2.000

Angles below 30 degrees shall not be used at Bruce Power

c Sling tension can be calculated as follows:

NOTE

Sling tension is based on 2 slings carrying the load

(Refer to 9.8 Multiple Leg Slings)

1 Symmetrical Loads with attachment points at equal

distances from the C of G

Sling Tension

= Weight ÷ 2 x Load Angle Multiplier

Slings
247

Example:

1,000 lb load is lifted with a 4-leg bridle sling.

Horizontal sling angle is 60°sling legs are of equal length

and C of G is in the centre of the load.

Load Angle Multiplier for 60 degrees is 1.154

Sling Tension = 1,000lb ÷ 2 x 1.154 = 577 lb.

2 Symmetrical Loads with a known sling angle

i Calculate the sling’s load weight distribution

ii Multiply the load weight distribution by the angle

of the corresponding load angle multiplier (Found

in Table 9-2)

Sling Tension = Weight ÷ 2 x Load Angle Multiplier

• 2,000lb ÷ 2 x 1.305 = 1,305lb

Figure 9-12

Calculating Sling Tension (known Angle of Loading)

248
Slings

d Sling leg tension in multiple sling lifts

T =
(WL)
N X
V

Where:

ft.
T = Tension in a single leg
L = 12
WL = Weight of load
V = 6 ft.

N = Number of sling legs

L = Length of sling legs


Weight = 24,000 lbs.

including hardware

V = Vertical distance of sling

NOTE: N is always 2. (Depending on weight distribution

during the lift there may be times that only 2 of the slings

are supporting the load.)

T =
24,000
2 1 X
6

12 6

= 24,000 X 1

T = 24,000

OR

T =
24,000

2 X
12

= 12,000 X 2

T = 24,000

Slings
249

e Symmetrical Load with an Unknown Sling Angle

1 Determine the Load Weight Distribution. Load

Weight Distribution is the percentage of the total

load that the sling is lifting.

2 Perform the following:

i determine total sling length (L) including any

hardware

ii determine the vertical height (H) from the

horizontal plane of the load, to the upper sling

attachment point

iii divide the sling-leg length (L) by the height (H).

The result is the Load Angle Multiplier (LAM)

3 Multiply the Load Angle Multiplier (LAM) by the

Load Weight Distribution. The sling is responsible

for the total tension or loading on the sling leg.

Sling Tension = L ÷ H x Weight ÷ 2

• 12 ft ÷ 8 ft x 5000lb ÷ 2 = 3750 lb

Figure 9-13

Calculating Sling Tension (unknown Angle of Loading)


250
Slings

f Offset Centre of Gravity (Asymmetrical Loads)

When calculating sling loading on loads with an

offset centre of gravity (C of G) and different sling

lengths the following process must be followed to

determine the correct share of the load.

L1 = 6.7 ft

L2 = 5ft

H = 3 ft

D1 = 6 ft

D2 = 4 ft

TD = 10 ft

WT = 10,000 lb

Figure 9-14

Calculating Sling Tension (offset C of G)

L1 Leg:

i D2 x WT ÷ TD = LWD

4 x 10000 ÷ 10 = 4000 lbs

ii L1 ÷ H = LAM

6.7 ÷ 3 = 2.233

iii LAM x LWD = Sling Tension

2.233 x 4000 = 8932 lbs

Slings
251

L2 Leg:

i D1 x WT ÷ TD = LWD

6 X 10000 ÷ 10 = 6000 lbs

ii L2 ÷ H = LAM

5 ÷ 3 = 1.666

iii LAM x LWD = Sling Tension

1.666 x 6000 = 9996 lbs

g Attachment Points at Different Elevations

When slings are attached to the load at different

elevations, unexpected stresses are created. The

following formulas will correctly calculate the

loading on the slings.

Figure 9-15

Calculating Sling Tension (attached at different elevations)


252
Slings

h When slings may be subjected to different tensions,

slings shall be chosen based on the higher sling

loading.

Example:

Figure 9-16a Centred C of G, Vertical Slings shows the C of

G in the centre of a load, which results in equal sling leg

tension. When lifting vertically, as depicted in Figure 9-16,

the load will be shared equally (e.g. if the weight of the load

is 10 tons, each sling leg as well as shackles and eyebolts,

will bear a load of 5 tons).

9-16a Vertical Slings 9-16b Angled Slings

Figure 9-16

Centered Centre of Gravity Angles

Figure 9-16 Centred C of G, Sling Angle, shows the C of G

in the centre of a load, which results in equal sling leg

tension. When the same lift is made with a sling angle of 60

degrees Figure 9-16b, sling tension is calculated as follows:

Example of sling tension in Figure 9-16b:

Sling Tension = Weight ÷ 2 x LAM,

Tension = 10 tons ÷ 2 x 1.154, Tension = 5.77 tons.

Each sling and attached hardware will have a tension

of 5.77 tons.
Slings
253

Figure 9-17a Offset C of G, Vertical Slings and Figure 9-17b

Offset C of G, Sling Angle, depict offset C of G loads,

which results in unequal load distribution.

1 When the C of G is not in the centre of a load,

slings and hardware will not be equally loaded.

The sling closest to the C of G, will carry a greater

share of the total load. The load is distributed in

the same ratio as the distance from the attachment

points to the centre of gravity, divided by the

spread of the attachment points, but inverse to

position.

2 Before sling tension is calculated, Load Weight

Distribution (LWD) must be determined. For

Figure 9-17a, to calculate LWD in sling 1, the

distance that the C of G is from the attachment

point on sling 2 (2 ft) is divided by the spread

between the attachment points (10 ft), multiplied

by 100%.

LWD for sling 1 = 2 ÷ 10 x 100%

LWD for sling 1 = 20%

Sling 1 will carry 20% of the load and sling 2 will

carry 80% of the load

3 Figure 9-17a, sling tension for vertical slings is

calculated as follows:

Sling Tension = LW x LWD

Tension in sling 1 = 10 tons x (2 ÷ 10 x 100%)

Tension = 2 tons.

Tension in sling 2 = 10 tons x (8 ÷ 10 x 100%)

Tension = 8 tons

254
Slings

17a Vertical Slings 17b Angled Slings

Figure 9-17

Offset C of G Sling Angles

i When a lift is made with slings on an angle, as in

Figure 7-17, Offset C of G, Sling Angle, Sling tension

is calculated as follows:

Sling tension

= LAM (of sling 1 from table 7-2 Load Angle Multipliers)

x Wt x LWD.

Tension in Sling 1

= 1.220 x 10 tons x (2 ÷ 10 x 100%)

Tension = 2.44 tons

Tension in sling 2

= 1.015 X 10 tons X (8 ÷ 10 X 100)

Tension = 8.12 tons

i After sling tension in both legs has been calculated,

slings shall be selected based on the sling with the

greatest tension.

ii Sling 2 in figure 9-17 has greater load due to C of

G location.
Slings
255

j Other reduction factors shall also be applied as

required (i.e. choker hitch or small D/d ratio).

9.3.3.3 Drifting Loads

The tension on two hoists and their associated rigging while

drifting a load can increase the loading enough to severely

overload the hoist and rigging. To determine how much

tension will be put on the hoist, use the following formula:

TD = 16’

D1 = 11’

D2 = 5’

L1 = 12’

L2 = 7’

H = 5’

WT = 2000 lbs

Figure 9-18

Calculating Drifting Loads

Hoist A:

Tension = (WT x D2 x L1) ÷ (H x TD)

(2000 x 5 x 12) ÷ (5 x 16)

120000 ÷ 80 = 1500 lbs

Hoist B:

Tension = (WT x D1 x L2) ÷ (H x TD)

(2000 x 11 x 7) ÷ (5 x 16)

154000 ÷ 80 = 1925 lbs

256
Slings

9.3.3.4 Field Tension Check

1 Measure up from the attachment point until you make

a 10” mark on the sling leg. (refer to Figure 9-19)

Figure 9-19

Step 1

2 Measure up from the attachment point along the

sling leg to the 10” mark. (refer to Figure 9-20)

Figure 9-20

Step 2

Slings
257

3 Divide 10” into the measured length (13”). The

result will be the load angle multiplier (LAM).

Multiply the Load Weight Distribution to get sling

Tension.

13 ÷ 10 = 1.3 (LAM) x LWD = Sling Tension

Figure 7-21

Step 3

258
Slings

9.4 Wire Rope Slings

9.4.1 General

a Fibre core wire rope slings shall not be used for

rigging.

b Each new wire rope sling purchased shall be marked

to show the following:

• sling manufacturer name or trademark

• rated capacity for type(s) of hitch(s) used and the

angle upon which it is based

• diameter or size

• the sling serial number or other form of

identification

c When a wire rope sling periodic inspection is

performed, existing slings shall be updated to comply

with sling identification requirements.

d Wire rope sling care includes the following

considerations:

• dropping loads on, or running vehicles over a wire

rope sling may cause crushing

• slings should be protected from corrosion and

contact with chemicals

• slings may be oiled to discourage rust, oil is

applied sparingly to avoid dirt accumulation

• slings should be stored by hanging in a dry, non-

vibrating location

• wire rope slings shall not be bent to a diameter less

than 10 times the diameter of the rope

Slings
259

9.4.2 Wire Rope Sling Strength Reduction

Due To Bending

a D/d ratio is the diameter around which a wire rope is

bent (D) divided by the body diameter of the wire

rope (d). Refer to Figure 9-22 Wire Rope Strength

Efficiency Due to D/d ratio.

Example: A 1/2” diameter wire rope is bent around a

10” diameter pipe:

D/d ratio is equal to 10” divided by 1/2” = D/d ratio

of 20:1. Efficiency of 1/2” wire rope with a 20:1 D/d

ratio is 91%; this will affect the rated capacity of a

wire rope.

b When six-strand wire rope is bent around sheaves or

other objects, there is a loss of strength due to this

bending action. As the D/d ratio reduces, wire rope

strength is reduced.

c Basket and choker hitch capacities listed in load

charts for six-strand rope are based on a minimum

D/d ratio of 25:1.

d Six-strand wire rope shall not be bent at a diameter

less than 25 times the diameter of the rope, without

de-rating, as wire rope will become permanently

distorted. Other types of wire rope have different

minimum D/d ratios. Manufacturer’s charts should be

referenced.

e Figure 9-22 Wire Rope Strength Efficiency Due to

D/d ratio, is based on static loads and applies to six-

strand class 6x19 and 6x37 wire rope. Wire rope

shall be de-rated as shown.

260
Slings

Figure 9-22

Wire Rope Strength Efficiency Due to D/d Ratio

f A basket hitch has twice the capacity of a single leg

only if the D/d ratio is 25:1 or greater and the sling is

vertical. Wire rope capacity is greatly affected by

sharp bends at pins, hooks, or the load.

g A better D/d ratio can be created by use of softeners.

h The radius of contact should be at least equal to one

rope lay.

i Since sling eyes have nearly double the strength of

the sling body, D/d ratio in a sling eye is not as

critical as when a sling is used in a basket hitch.

j Figure 9-23 D/d Ratio Affects, (a to e) illustrates

various considerations for D/d ratio:

1 Sling eye length shall not be less than twice the

object (hook) diameter (Figure 9-23a).

2 If hardware over which a sling eye is placed has a

minimum D/d ratio of 1:1, an adjustment in

capacity is not required (Figure 9-23b).


Slings
261

3 If the object lifted with a six-strand wire rope in a

basket hitch has a minimum D/d ratio of 25:1, an

adjustment in capacity is not required

(Figure 9-23c).

4 If a shackle has 2 times the diameter of a 6 strand

wire rope sling and a D/d ratio of 2:1 is obtained,

the basket sling capacity shall be reduced by 35%

(Figure 9-23d).

5 If a larger shackle or wide body shackle is used,

and a D/d ratio of 5:1 is obtained, the basket sling

capacity shall be reduced by 25% (Figure 9-23e).

Figure 9-23

D/d Ratio Effects

262
Slings

k D/d Sling Ratio (to avoid permanent kink in wire rope)

Bending wire rope reduces its strength and can give

the wire rope a permanent bend. (refer to Table 9-3

Vertical Basket “D/d” Rated Capacity Adjustment)

for capacity reduction due to D/d ratio.

Example 1:

D
=
Diameter of Object
=
25
=
25 D/d

(1” wire rope)

d Diameter of Wire Rope 1


ratio

D/d ratio of 25 is equal to 100% strength.

25”

Therefore no further calculation required.


d

Example 2:
(1/2” wire rope)

D
=
Diameter of Object
=
8
=
16 D/d
D

d Diameter of Wire Rope .5


ratio

D/d ratio of 15 is equal to 89% strength efficiency.

As per Table 9.4 Rated Capacities for Single-Leg

Slings for 6 x 19 and 6 x 37 Classifications,

improved Plow, IWRC (2), a 1/2” wire rope with a

mechanical splice is equal to 4.4 tons, so:

4.4 x .89 = 3.916 tons

Table 9-3

Vertical Basket “D/d” Rated Capacity Adjustment

Ratio A
Strength
IWRC and FC Wire Rope Sling

(D/d)
Efficiency
Rated Capacity Multiplier

25 100% 1.00

20 91% 0.91

15 89% 0.89

10 86% 0.86

8 83% 0.83

6 79% 0.79

4 75% 0.75

2 65% 0.65

1 50% 0.50

Note: This table is based on static loads only and applies to 6x19

and 6 x 37 class rope.

Slings
263

Table 9-4

Rated Capacities for Single-Leg Slings for 6 x 19 and 6 x 37

Classifications, Improved Plow, IWRC [2]

Rope Rated Capacities, Tons (2,000 lbs)

Diameter
Vertical Choker Vertical Basket

Construction (inches)

HT MS HT MS HT MS

1/4 6 x 19 0.53 0.56 0.40 0.42 1 1.1

5/16 6 x 19 0.81 0.87 0.61 0.65 1.6 1.7

3/8 6 x 19 1.1 1.2 0.86 0.93 2.3 2.5

7/16 6 x 19 1.5 1.7 1.2 1.3 3.1 3.4

1/2 6 x 19 2.0 2.2 1.5 1.6 3.9 4.4

9/16 6 x 19 2.5 2..7 1.8 2.1 4.9 5.5

5/8 6 x 19 3.0 3.4 2.2 2.5 6.0 6.8

3/4 6 x 19 4.2 4.9 3.1 3.6 8.4 9.7

7/8 6 x 19 5.5 6.6 4.1 4.9 11.0 13.0

1 6 x 19 7.2 8.5 5.4 6.4 14.0 17.0

1 1/8 6 x 19 9.0 10.0 6.8 7.8 18.0 21.0

1 1/4 6 x 37 10.0 12.0 7.9 9.2 21.0 24.0

1 3/8 6 x 37 13.0 15.0 9.6 11.0 25.0 29.0

1 1/2 6 x 37 15.0 17.0 11.0 13.0 30.0 35.0

1 5/8 6 x 37 18.0 20.0 13.0 15.0 35.0 41.0

1 3/4 6 x 37 20.0 24.0 15.0 18.0 41.0 47.0

2 6 x 37 26.0 30.0 20.0 23.0 53.0 61.0

264
Slings

Table 9-5

Fractions of Inches and Inches Converted to Decimals

Inches Decimals of Inch Decimals of Foot

1/16 0.062 0.005

1/8 0.125 0.010

3/16 0.187 0.015

1/4 0.250 0.020

5/16 0.312 0.026

3/8 0.375 0.031

7/16 0.437 0.036

1/2 0.500 0.041

9/16 0.562 0.046

5/8 0.625 0.052

11/16 0.6875 0.057

3/4 0.750 0.062

13/16 0.8125 0.067

7/8 0.875 0.072

15/16 0.9375 0.078

1 0.083

2 0.166

3 0.250

4 0.333

5 0.416

6 0.500

7 0.583

8 0.666

9 0.750

10 0.833

11 0.916

12 1.000

Slings
265

l Large objects shall not be placed into a sling eye,

which would result in splitting forces affecting sling

splice and sling safety. Shackles, hooks or bars placed

into a sling shall not be larger than 1/2 the sling loop

eye length as shown in Table 9-6, Sling Loop Eye

Dimensions.

m Moderate permanent bends do not weaken the sling

provided it is not fatigued by repeated bending and

straightening. Minor deformation may relate to how

the sling was stored and can be removed by applying

a moderate load to the sling for a few minutes.

Table 9-6

Sling Loop Eye Dimensions

Wire Rope Size Loop Eye Size


Sling Dimensions

Length and Width

Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters

1/4 to 3/8 6 to 10 4 x2 100 x 50

7/16 11 7 x 3-1/2 130 x 90

1/2 12 to 13 8 x4 200 x 100

9/16 14 9 x 4-1/2 230 x 110

5/8 16 10 x 5 250 x 125

3/4 18 to 19 12 x 6 300 x 150

7/8 20 to 22 14 x 7 350 x 175

1 24 to 26 16 x 8 400 x 200

1-1/8 28 18 x 9 450 x 225

1-1/4 32 20 x 10 500 x 250

1-1/2 38 24 x 12 600 x 300

266
Slings

9.4.3 Wire Rope Sling Examples

a The most reliable splice for slings is the Flemish Eye

splice (rolled-in eye) and is the most commonly used

with six-strand wire rope. (refer to Figure 9-24

Flemish Eye)

b The most common wire rope sling classification is

6x19, which has a variety of constructions. The

following minimum information is required when

ordering new 6x19 class slings:

• Lay: 6x19 pre-formed single part six-strand, right-

hand regular lay

• Core: pre-formed Independent Wire Rope Core

(IWRC)

• Material: grade 110/120 Improved Plow Steel (IPS)

wire or greater

• Mechanical splice: shall be made with the Flemish

eye method, finished with a seamless steel sleeve,

swaged with a hydraulic press

c Rope construction for 6X19 class slings is:

• 1/4” to 3/8”: 7x19, IWRC (6 strands of 19 wires

around 1 centre core of 19 wires)

• 7/16” to 3/4”: 6x26 Warrington-Seale, IWRC

• 7/8” to 11/4”: 6X25 Filler, IWRC

• 11/2” to 21/2”: 6x36 Warrington-Seale, IWRC

Slings
267

Figure 9-24

Flemish Eye

9.4.4 Wire Rope Grommet

A wire rope grommet is an endless type sling. Points of

wear may be distributed around the circumference as the

sling is used (refer to Figure 9-25 Grommet Slings).

a Rope diameter and inside circumference shall be

specified when ordering.

b If sling legs form a sling angle, basket hitch capacity

shall be adjusted.

c D/d ratio shall be determined prior to every lift and

capacities adjusted from Figure 9-22 Wire Rope

Strength Efficiency Due to D/d ratio,

1 Sling capacity is based on D/d ratio of 5:1, hooks

and hardware should be selected accordingly, (i.e.

Figure 9-25, item 1 at hook and item 2 at shackle).

2 Effect of load size on D/d ratio shall be considered,

(i.e. Figure 9-25, item 3).

3 Grommet slings have no sling eyes, therefore D/d

ratio of 1:1 shall not be used without derating (i.e.

Figure 9-25, shackles at items 1, 4 and 5).

268
Slings

Figure 9-25

Grommet Slings

d Special slings may be approved by site engineering,

after being proof tested by the manufacturer to twice

the rated load and having permanent sling

identification attached.

9.4.5 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Wire rope slings shall be inspected before use for the

following:

• Periodic Inspection identification.

• Missing or illegible sling identification tag.

• Broken Wires: For six-strand wire rope slings, 6 or

more randomly distributed broken wires in one rope

lay, or 3 broken wires in one strand in one rope lay,

or a broken wire at an end fitting. The same rules

apply to each component rope in flexible wire rope

slings.

Slings
269

• Metal Loss: Wear or scraping of one-third original

diameter of outside individual wires. This is difficult

to determine and requires some experience to

perform.

• Distortion: Kinking, crushing, bird caging, wires or

strands that are pushed out of their original position,

or other damage which distorts rope structure. Note

the following exceptions:

1 slight bends where wires or strands are close to

their original position would not be considered

cause for rejection

2 minor permanent bends do not weaken a rope

provided it is not fatigued by repeated bending and

straightening

3 minor deformation may relate to how the rope was

stored, and may be removed by applying a

moderate load to the rope for a few minutes

• Heat Damage: Any metallic discolouration caused by

heat.

• Damaged End Attachments: Cracked, bent, worn or

broken end fittings.

• Bent or Twisted Hooks: Hooks shall not be used if

cracked, throat opening is greater than as

manufactured, twisted from the plane of the unbent

hook, or it has missing or damaged safety latches.

• Corrosion: Severe corrosion of a rope, end

attachments or fittings which have caused pitting or

binding of wires. Light rusting usually does not affect

sling strength.

270
Slings

• Pulled Eye Splices: Any evidence that eye splices have

slipped, tucked strands have moved, or pressed

sleeves show serious damage.

• Damaged Sling Eye: Severe crushing, flat spots or

defects near eye or socket. Sharp bends and moderate

flattening of wires in the sling eye are not causes for

rejection.

• Mechanical damage: Kinks from pulling the sling

body through a loop (choker hitch) may cause wires

or strands to be deformed and pushed out of their

original position. This unbalances a sling, reducing

its strength.

• Other conditions, including visible damage that cause

doubt as to integrity of sling.

Slings
271

9.5 Synthetic Slings

All fabric web slings must have a tag with the basic

information outlined in Section 9.1 General. Slings with

illegible tags shall be discarded and a replacement ordered.

9.5.1 Synthetic Web Slings

a Synthetic Web Slings are non-rotating and offer great

flexibility, resistance to shock loads and a wide

gripping surface that will not mar or scratch the load

surfaces. Some materials other than nylon are used to

provide special features such as heat resistance,

abrasion resistance, etc.

b Synthetic web slings are lighter than wire rope slings

with no hazard of broken wire ends.

c Synthetic web slings may be manufactured endless or

with eyes. Eyes of wider slings are often folded,

giving a tapered end that will properly fit hardware

and load hooks.

d Specially designed metal end fittings may be supplied

for flat web slings.

e Manufacturer’s catalogues should be referenced for

size and construction. Special construction and

upgrades are available. For example: wear pads, edge

protection and protection from moisture or dirt.

f Vertical, choker and basket sling capacities shall be

marked on each sling and are based on a design

factor of five. Ratings apply to straight pull lifts on

any sling angle.

g Manufacturer’s tables for bridle and basket

configurations shall be used with extreme caution at

low sling angles as one edge of the web may overload

and the sling may tear.


272
Slings

h To avoid edge loading of slings, spreader bars or the

longest possible slings should be used.

Figure 9-26

Edge Loading

i There shall be no sharp edges or surfaces on hooks

or hardware that may cause abrasion.

j Sling eyes shall be 3 times as long as a hook width or

pin diameter, some web slings have extra long eyes

for this purpose. A sling eye shall not be forced over

an attachment.

Figure 9-27

Sling Eye to Hook Fit

Slings
273

9.5.2 Synthetic Round Slings

a Synthetic round slings are made from polyester or

other high performance fibers (HPF). These materials

are strong and lightweight resulting in a sling that is

light for its capacity when compared to wire rope or

chain slings.

b Slings made from these fibers normally consist of one

(for polyester) or two bundles (for HPF) of load

bearing fibers that are protected from mechanical and

chemical damage by a double covering of nylon,

polyester or other synthetic fabric.

c Slings are provided with one or more “tell-tales”.

Tell-tales are fibers used to indicate sling damage. If

tell-tales are not visible, the sling shall be sent back

to the manufacturer for inspection and possible

repair.

d Fiber optic cables are another inspection system

fabricated into some slings. If no light is transmitted

through the cables, core yarn damage is possible.

f Selection information and special hardware is

available from manufacturers.

g Synthetic round slings are flexible and conform well

to a load. Minimum bend radius is equal to the sling

width. Unlike a web sling, there is no concentration

of load at the edges.

h Vertical, choker and basket sling capacities shall be

marked on each sling and are based on a design

factor of five.

274
Slings

9.5.3 Corner Softeners and Wear Pads

a A “sharp” corner occurs when the radius of the edge

of the object to be lifted is less than the width of the

sling.

b An approved corner softener is required to be used

on sharp corners. The commercially available

CornerMax TM softener is the standard softener at

Bruce Power. No shop made softeners, pieces of old

slings, sheet rubber, carpet, plywood and lumber, fire

hoses, gloves, or pieces of pipe shall be used unless

there is no other alternative and Engineering

approval has been obtained.

Figure 9-28

Example of a Softener in Use

c Wear pads are typically pieces of heavy nylon or

polyester used to protect the load from chafing by

the sling. They also protect the sling from chafing by

the load. Wear pads are NOT acceptable as corner

protectors.

Slings
275

Figure 9-29

Example of a Wear Pad

9.5.4 Synthetic Sling Operating Practices

a Sharp corners in contact with synthetic slings should

be padded with material of sufficient strength to

prevent cutting or damage to the sling.

b A sling should be of sufficient length to ensure choke

action is on the sling body, not on the sling splice,

fittings, eye, or at the base of a sling eye or fitting.

Tags and labels shall be kept away from the load,

hook and point of choke.

c Slings shall seat properly in a hook or lifting device.

Inadequate pin diameters and folding, bunching or

pinching of synthetic slings will reduce the WLL.

d Slings shall not be shortened, lengthened or adjusted

by knotting. Only manufacturer approved methods

shall be used.

e Twisting and kinking of sling legs shall be avoided.

f Prolonged exposure to sunlight or ultraviolet light

should be avoided with nylon web slings. Polyester

slings are affected less by ultraviolet rays.

g Slings should be stored in a cool, dry, and dark place

to prevent environmental damage. Soap or detergent

and water should be used to clean a synthetic sling.

276
Slings

h Nylon and polyester slings shall not be used at

temperatures above 194°F (90°C) or below -40°F

(-40°C) or when required to be in contact with

objects which are within this range. Slings shall not

be used if frozen. Nylon web sling capacity shall be

reduced by 15% if wet.

i Web slings with aluminum fittings or synthetic fibre

slings such as nylon and polyester shall not be used

where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of

acids, phenols or other caustic agents are present.

j Nylon slings are less affected than polyester slings

when subjected to bunching and small curvatures in

some rigging attachments.

k Nylon slings stretch more than polyester slings and

therefore should not be used together on the same

lift. Polyester and nylon slings are similar in colour,

therefore the sling tag should be checked to confirm

material type.

l Wire rope or chain slings should be used in harsh

conditions when synthetic materials are not

permitted. A determination of environmental

conditions shall be made by a qualified person.

m Synthetic slings should not be used in radiation areas

unless no other option is practical. If necessary, the

following precautions apply:

• when not in use, synthetic slings shall not be left in

fields greater than 100 mr/h

• As Low as Reasonably Achievable (ALARA)

principals shall be followed to ensure the sling does

not receive greater than 100,000 rad during the life

of the sling
Slings
277

n All Grade 80 fittings connected to synthetic slings

shall have a design factor of 5:1.

o Do not pull from under loads when the load is

resting on a sling.

p If a web sling with metal fitting is used in a choker

hitch, make sure that it is long enough so that the

choking action is on the webbing.

9.5.5 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Synthetic slings shall be inspected before use for the

following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• missing or illegible sling identification tag

• acid or caustic burns

• evidence of heat damage

• holes, tears, cuts or snags (a synthetic sling shall

not be used even if it has a small nick in the edge)

• excessive abrasive wear

• wear or snags that expose core yarns in round slings

• broken or worn stitching in load bearing splices

• knots used to shorten sling length

• pitted, corroded, cracked, bent, twisted, gouged or

broken fittings

• other conditions, including visible damage that

cause doubt as to integrity of sling


278
Slings

9.6 Chain Slings

9.6.1 General

a Chain slings shall be Grade 80 or 100 alloy chain or

better and have a design factor of 5:1.

b Each sling shall be identified with a metal tag

identifying the following:

• sling manufacturer name or trademark

• grade

• nominal chain size

• number of legs

• rated capacity for type(s) of hitch(s) used and the

angle upon which it is based

• length (reach)

• sling serial number or other form of identification

c Links are rated for single leg slings only. Hooks shall

not be attached back to the master link. If a hook is

attached back onto the master link creating a basket,

a double leg sling will result, which will exceed the

master link rated capacity.

d Chain slings should be lightly oiled and stored in a

dry, non-vibrating place.

CAUTION

Most commercial manufacturers of chain slings make

them to a factor of safety of 4. Ontario OHSA regulations

require a Factor of safety of five, so do not rely on

manufacturers’ tables for this information.

Slings
279

9.6.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Chain slings shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• missing or illegible sling identification tag

• cracked or broken links or fittings

• gouges, chips, or cuts

• weld splatter

• severe corrosion or pitting

• link wear

• elongated, stretched, bent or twisted links or

components

• evidence of heat damage (including discoloration due

to exposure to heat)

• inability of chain or components to articulate (hinge)

freely

• other conditions, including visible damage that cause

doubt as to integrity of sling

280
Slings

9.7 Fibre Rope Slings

a Rope slings are normally made of three-strand

polypropylene or Dacron rope with an eye splice at

each end.

b Fibre Rope slings shall be manufactured by a fibre

rope supplier.

c Field splices of fibre rope slings are not permitted.

Slings
281

9.8 Multiple Leg Slings

a When choosing slings for a four legged bridle, it shall

not be assumed that each leg will share the load

equally (refer to Figure 9-30 Four-Legged Sling).

• Variation in sling length and height of sling

attachment points may result in the load being

carried by two legs. Additional legs will aid in

balancing the load.

• Since two diagonally opposite legs will carry more

load, “two-legged” capacity from appropriate load

tables shall be used when choosing slings.

b Some manufacturer’s bridle slings may specify higher

three or four-leg capacities verses two-leg capacity.

All sling legs shall be attached to the load and the

WLL on the tag shall be used.

Figure 9-30

Four-Legged Sling

(shown with and without an Equalizer Beam)

NOTE

The slings on the right share the load equally. The slings

on the left share most of the load between two

diagonally opposite slings.

282
Slings

Figure 9-31

Multiple Leg Slings and Load Distribution

c Sling selection is affected when an equalizer beam is

used.

• Without an equalizer beam, four 5/8” diameter

wire rope slings would be needed to lift a 10,000

lb load at a 60° sling angle from a single hook

attachment point.

• When using an equalizer beam each end supports

approximately 50% of the load. Four 7/16”

diameter wire rope slings would be needed to lift a

5,000 lb load with a sling angle of 60° suspended

from two attachment points. Refer to Section 9.0

Rigging Tools and Devices, for more information

on spreader beams and equalizer beams.

d Unused sling legs shall be secured or removed prior

to lifting a load (Figure 9-32 Securing Slings).

e Loose objects shall be removed from the load.

f A three leg slink equally distributes the load between

all slings. As a precaution, the slings shall be chosen

such that they can carry 40% of the load.


Slings
283

Figure 9-32

Securing Slings

284
Slings

10.0 Rigging Tools and Devices

10.1 Small Hoisting Devices

10.2 Portable Chain Hoists

10.3 Lever Operated Hoists

10.4 Chain Operated Hoists

10.4.1 General

10.4.2 Pre-Use Inspection

10.5 Electric or Air Operated Chain or

Wire Rope Hoists

10.5.1 General

10.5.2 Pre-Use Inspection

10.6 Wire Rope Tensioners or

Cable Type Hoists (Tirfor)

10.6.1 General

10.6.2 Pre-Use Inspection

10.7 Jacks

10.7.1 General

10.7.2 Pre-Use Inspection

10.8 Caged Steel Rollers

10.8.1 General

10.8.2 Pre-Use Inspection

10.9 Load Binders

10.10 Dynamometers

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


285

10.11 Spreader Beams and Equalizer Beams

10.11.1 General

10.11.2 Spreader Beam and Equalizer Beam

Pre-Use Inspection

10.12 A-Frames

10.12.1 General

10.12.2 Pre-Use Inspection

10.13 Jib Cranes

10.13.1 General

10.13.2 Pre-Use Inspection

10.14 Portable Boom Cranes (Engine Hoists)

10.14.1 General

10.14.2 Pre-Use Inspection

10.15 Monorail Beams

10.15.1 General

10.15.2 Pre Use Inspection

10.16 Beam Clamps

10.16.1 General

10.16.2 Pre-Use Inspection

10.16.3 Beam clamps vs. Pipe hanger clamps

10.17 Beam Trolleys

10.17.1 General

10.17.2 Pre-Use Inspection

10.18 Plate Clamps

10.18.1 General

10.18.2 Pre-Use Inspection

286
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.20 Tackle Blocks and Snatch Blocks

10.20.1 General

10.20.2 Snatch Blocks

10.20.3 Rope Blocks

10.20.4 Parts of Line

10.20.5 Wire Rope Strength Efficiency

10.20.6 Loads on Blocks

10.20.7 Load on Structure

10.20.8 Groove Size

10.20.9 Pre-Use Inspection

10.21 Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices new to

Bruce Power

10.22 Shutdown and Storage

NOTE

All rigging and lifting equipment maintenance and

inspection at Bruce Power is covered in BP-PROC-00587,

Inspection Requirements for Rigging, Lifting and Material

Handling Equipment. In the event of a discrepancy

between this handbook and the procedure, BP-PROC-

00587 shall be deemed to be correct.

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


287

10.1 Small Hoisting Devices

Visual Inspection Criteria

The following items should be visually checked before using

a hoist, crane or other lifting device. These items serve to

indicate that damage may have occurred to the device.

Further inspection, testing by competent maintenance

persons will be required to place the device in service.

• Check for excessive wear.

• Check for obvious gross mechanical damage, cracks,

twisting, bending, bulging, buckling and abrasion

damage.

• Check that wire rope and slings are in acceptable

condition as per OHSA.

• Check for rust, corrosion, peeling paint and other

surface flaws that may indicate other damage.

• Check for missing components.

• Check for improperly substituted or modified

components, such as bolts substituted for shackle

pins, pipe hangers substituted for beam clamps and

welded eyebolts, hooks or alloy chain.

• Check for freedom of moving parts.

• Check attachment points, supports and

mating/connecting components.

• Check for the correct reeving of the wire rope, if

applicable.

• Check that the device has a clearly identifiable load

rating.

• Check for hydraulic leaks, if applicable.

• Report any defects to your supervisor immediately.


288
Rigging Tools and Devices

Defective equipment shall not be used for any purpose

other than a test by a competent maintenance person.

Small portable hoisting and pulling devices used in rigging

include:

• lever or chain operated hoists

• electric or air operated hoists

• monorail hoists

• tugger hoists

• tirfor hoists

• portable boom cranes

a Equipment shall be removed from service if unusual

performance is noted including but not limited to:

• abnormal operation

• peculiar noises or jerky operation

• visual defects or damage

b The capacity of a hoist shall not exceed the capacity

of the anchor point to which it is attached.

c Where multiple hoists are used on a single anchor

point (i.e. on a monorail), the maximum combined

capacity of the hoists shall not exceed the maximum

anchor point WLL.

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


289

d When available, manufacturer’s installation and

maintenance manuals shall be followed.

e Instructions and warnings on, or attached to

equipment shall be followed.

f Only competent personnel shall repair hoisting or

pulling devices and shall only use manufacturer

recommended parts and materials.

Figure 10-1

Manually Operated Chain Hoists

290
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.2 Portable Chain Hoists

Manually operated chain hoists may be classified as follows:

(refer to Figure 10-1 Manually Operated Chain Hoists)

• Spur-geared endless chain operated

• Worm-geared (screw geared) endless-chain

operated or lever operated

• Differential, endless chain or lever operated

• Lever-Operated

a The load chain on these hoists is a special case-

hardened product and does not carry the same

markings as grade 80 alloy chain. This chain shall

not be choked. If a link is distorted, it may jam the

mechanism. Load chain is too brittle for any other

application such as slings or load binders.

b Spur and worm-geared hoists are furnished with

hand and load chains and are operated by pulling the

hand chain. Lever operated hoists are operated by a

hand lever or handle. Generally, endless chain hoists

are used for hoisting, and lever operated hoists are

used for pulling the load horizontally or vertically.

c If a load must be left suspended, the load shall be

blocked or physically secured in place.

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


291

10.3 Lever Operated Hoists

Lever hoists are a portable means of lifting or pulling loads

short distances, and are available in various capacities from

3/4 ton to 6 ton. Lever hoists are often used when rigging

with limited headroom. They are available in a load brake

(friction disc) or a ratchet-and-pawl design. Load-brakes

depend on frictional resistance of the brake discs. Lever

hoists with a load-brake are recommended for use in Bruce

Power.

a Worm-geared hoists have sufficient internal friction

to prevent running away when lowering loads. Spur-

geared hoists are usually provided with a load brake

in the mechanism.

b Ratchet hoists are unsuitable where a smooth

hoisting operation is required and operation in a

confined space is difficult because of the forward and

backward movement of the handle.

c When using a ratchet hoist, the load is held by the

hand lever during the lifting or lowering stroke and if

accidentally released, the lever will swing back

forcefully. Accidental release of the lever may result

in self-ratcheting until the load bottoms, although

some units are designed to prevent self-ratcheting.

d Hoists should be kept clean and dry, and brake faces

shall be dry and free from oil and grease. Internal

dirt or grease build-up may cause a load to drop

when lowering light loads.

e Lever operated hoists may be used at any angle. They

are designed to lift their WLL with reasonable force

exerted on the handle. Extending the hoist handle

with a length of pipe or using two people at the same

time to operate the hoist shall not be done as this

may overload and damage the hoist.


292
Rigging Tools and Devices

f When a lever hoist is used as an adjustable sling leg

on a crane and the load has been taken up with the

lever hoist, it’s brakes will be engaged. In order to

release the brake, the lever should be reversed before

the tension of the load is completely released

otherwise the brake will remain engaged.

g Recent OPEX, confirmed by the manufacturer,

indicates that the brakes on COFFING lever-operated

hoists will NOT set properly if the load on the device

is less than 50 lb.

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


293

10.4 Chain Operated Hoists

10.4.1 General

Endless chain hoists are operated from below where the

operator can control the load. They are not provided with a

control for free-chain operation and the hook is raised or

lowered by pulling the operating chain.

a The slow rate of travel of a chain hoist allows precise

vertical placement of a load.

b Chain hoists manufactured with a load limiter should

be used to prevent overloading the hoisting device.

c The lower hook is designed to open first if

overloaded to prevent rigging from falling.

d Chain hoists may be used as adjustable sling legs to

level loads.

e The area in which a hoist is installed shall provide

sufficient space for the following:

• the operator to safely operate the hand chain

• the operator and other personnel to stand clear of

the load at all times

• firm footing for the operator

f Chain hoists shall be rigged to allow a straight line

between the upper and lower hooks.

• Clearance for the hoist frame to swivel on the

upper hook shall be provided.

• Chain hoists should be used in a near vertical

position and should hang freely.

• The gear housing may be damaged if it is rested

against an object while under load.


294
Rigging Tools and Devices

g If a hoist has been shock loaded or involved in a

rigging incident, it shall be removed from service and

sent for inspection.

h The pull chain is designed for one person to lift the

WLL of a hoist with normal force on the chain. No

more than one person shall operate the pull chain,

otherwise overloading and damage may result.

i When using two hoists to lift a load, the tension in

each sling leg shall be calculated.

1 To prevent roll out, two separate shackles should

be used to attach hoists to the load.

2 As the load moves, tension in each leg will change.

3 The higher the load raises the greater the tension

on each sling leg.

4 The tension in each leg as shown in Figure 10-2

Lift with Lever Operated Hoists, may be calculated

as follows:

• Tension

= Length ÷ Height x Weight x Load Weight Distribution

• Tension in Hoist A

= 7 ÷ 5 x 2,000 x (11 ÷ 16)

= 1,925 lb

• Tension in Hoist B

= 12 ÷ 5 x 2,000 x (5 ÷ 16)

= 1,500 lb

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


295

Figure 10-2

Lift with Lever Operated Hoists

10.4.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Hoisting devices shall be inspected before use for the

following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• WLL of the hoist is marked on the housing

• load chain and guide for cleanliness, wear or damage

• hoisting rope for cleanliness, lubrication and damage

• hooks swivel freely and are equipped with a safety

latch

• damage, cracks or distortion to hooks

• support shoulder of lifting hooks for wear

• anchorage for signs of damage

• operation of limit switches, if fitted

• brakes for evidence of drift or slippage (raise load a

few inches, pause and check)


296
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.5 Electric or Air Operated Chain

or Wire Rope Hoists

10.5.1 General

a Hoists shall have the following markings:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• rated capacity marked on the hoist

• manufacturer’s name

• manufacturer’s model or serial number

• if air operated, air pressure rating

• if electrically operated, the power supply voltage,

phase and frequency of AC power

b Hoists may be suspended from a fixed point, beam

clamp or beam trolley.

c Trolleys may be motorized, or moved manually by

tugging gently on the pendent.

10.5.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


297

10.6 Wire Rope Tensioners

or Cable Type Hoists (Tirfor)

10.6.1 General

a Wire rope tensioners or cable type hoists have the

following characteristics (refer to Figure 10-3 Wire

Rope Tensioner or Cable Type Hoist):

• operates manually by a lever handle with no “snap

back”

• are available in 1, 2 and 4 ton capacities, with

5/16”, 7/16” and 5/8” wire rope respectively

• may be reeved through a block system to increase

capacity and mechanical advantage

• may be used vertically or horizontally

• may be reversed under load

• will hold load at any position

b Wire rope tensioners or cable type hoists shall use

6x25 filler, IWRC, Grade 110/120 wire rope with a

clipped loop on the slack end to prevent it from

passing through the hoist.

298
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.6.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Wire rope tensioners and cable hoists shall be inspected

before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• loose bolts, nuts, and rivets

• levers for bends and cracks

• damage to the hoist support

• is reeved in compliance with hoist manufacturer or

site engineering recommendations

• the intended use is within the rated capacity of the

hoist

• functional mechanism for proper operation

Figure 10-3

Wire Rope Tensioner or Cable Type Hoist

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


299

10.7 Jacks

10.7.1 General

a No work shall be done under a load supported by a

jack. The jack is a lifting device only. The load must

be blocked to work under it.

b There are 2 SME standards for jacks:

1 ASME B30.1 is a lifting device standard. Jacks

used at Bruce Power for maintenance purposes are

expected to meet this standard.

2 ASME PALD (Portable Automotive Lifting

Devices) made to this standard require approval

from engineering before use.

c Mechanical and hydraulic jacks are available in

various capacities and shall have:

• rated capacity clearly marked on the jack

• sufficient capacity for the intended load

• firm footing that will not slip or tip under load

• suitable blocking used to support the load after it

is raised

d Ratchet jacks provide both toe and head lift (refer to

Figure 10-4 Ratchet Jacks).

e Reel type jacks are used in pairs for raising reels of

cable or wire rope where the lifting shaft is placed on

the side hook or U-saddle cap.

300
Rigging Tools and Devices

Figure 10-4

Ratchet Jacks

f Hydraulic rams and jacks have the following

characteristics (refer to Figure 10-5 Hydraulic Jacks):

• are available in various capacities (Up to 300 tons)

and ram travels

• may be used for pulling or pushing, either

vertically or horizontally, however care must be

taken to prevent excessive eccentric and side

loading which may cause damage to the cylinder

walls and seals

• may use separate pumps to power several rams at

once

• may be self-contained or have a separate pump,

(the separate pump is usually connected to the jack

by hydraulic hoses with quick-disconnect)

• may be powered by hand, air, electricity or a gas

engine

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


301

• rams may be double-acting, which retract under

hydraulic power

• hydraulic hoses with quick-disconnect fittings

normally connect the pump and jack

g Hydraulic rams and jacks require the following

considerations:

• Eccentric and side loading should be avoided to

prevent cylinder wall and seal damage.

• When not in use, end caps shall be used to keep

out dirt and protect the threads.

• Jacks shall be stored in the fully lowered position

to avoid damage to the ram.

• Pumps, seals and release valves shall be inspected

periodically.

• Jacks should be stored inside a heated building in

cold weather to avoid damage from moisture

caused by condensation.

CAUTION

Under NO circumstances shall hydraulic pressure be

relied on as a satisfactory support to work on a load.

302
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.7.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Jacks shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• hydraulic leaks (where applicable)

• gross mechanical defects

Figure 10-5

Hydraulic Jacks

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


303

10.8 Caged Steel Rollers

10.8.1 General

a Caged steel rollers are designed for moving heavy loads

in a straight line, but turntable tops may be used for

gradual turns (refer to Figure 10-6 Caged Steel Rollers).

b Various size rollers are available with capacity ratings

from 35 to 200 tons.

c Rollers shall be selected to ensure the capacity of any

two are able to support the load.

d Steering bars shall be used for turning.

Sledgehammers shall not be used.

e Steel plates should be used to protect concrete floors

and allow smooth movement.

f Chocks or wedges may damage rollers if used to stop

or hold a load.

g Caged steel rollers should be handled carefully, kept

clean and lubricated.

10.8.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Rollers shall be inspected for damage before use (Periodic

Inspection is not required).

Figure 9-7

Caged Steel Rollers


304
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.10 Dynamometers

Dynamometers accurately determine load weight and

monitor the forces exerted on rigging. Regular use of

dynamometers to determine and monitor loads has been

shown to reduce hoisting incidents and accidents. Ensure

the following:

• End fittings are designed for the WLL of the

instrument.

• After a lift, the weight of the load should be

permanently recorded (on the load or drawings).

• Dynamometers shall be treated as any other piece of

rigging equipment, requiring Periodic Inspection,

annual calibration and routine maintenance.

• Dynamometers shall not be overloaded. If it is

suspected that they have been overloaded, they must

be recalibrated.

• Figures obtained from a dynamometer may be

inaccurate by as much as +/- 5% of the actual weight

of the load.

306
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.11 Spreader Beams

and Equalizer Beams

10.11.1 General

An equalizer beam is used to distribute a load between two

cranes. A spreader beam is used to distribute the attachment

points under a single crane hook.

a An equalizer beam may be used as a spreader beam

however, a spreader beam shall not be used as an

equalizer beam.

b Site designed or fabricated beams require site

engineering approval and the WLL shall be marked

on the device.

c Spreader beams may be used to perform the

following (refer to Figure 10-8 Spreader Beam):

• support long loads during lifts

• eliminate the hazard of load tipping, sliding or

bending

• reduce the possibility of low sling angles or slings

being pulled of a hook

• provide a vertical lift on eye bolts

d Spreader beams shall be designed and approved by

the RSE.

e The distance between attachment points is used in

calculations to determine the WLL of spreader

beams, modifications shall be approved by site

engineering.

f Lifting loads on a platform using spreader beams

shall not be done. A rigid skip box or enclosed

container shall be used.


Rigging Tools a nd Devices
307

Figure 10-8

Spreader Beam

g Equalizer beams (lifting beams) may be used to

perform the following:

• equalize the load on sling legs

• lift loads in areas with limited headroom

• allow loads to be shared in any proportion when

using two hooks

h Equalizer beams may have a single pick-up point on

top and two or more load suspension points on the

bottom of the beam (refer to Figure 10-9 Equalizer

Beam).

i Crane attachment points and the load suspension

point may be positioned along an equalizer beam to

lift out-of-balance loads while keeping them level.

j Equalizer beams shall be engineered to safely

withstand the bending forces to which they may be

subjected.

308
Rigging Tools and Devices

k Spreader beams shall be permanently marked with

the load rating, dimensions, weight and names of

fabricator as applicable. Unrated lifting devices shall

not be used without prior engineering approval.

Figure 10-9

Equalizer Beams

10.11.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Beams shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• the WLL and weight of the beam are permanently

marked on the beam

• dimensions and weight of the beam

• cracks, twisting, bending, bulging and abrasion

damage

• the integrity of the attachment points

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


309

10.12 A-Frames

10.12.1 General

A-Frames are self supporting, portable structures, from

which a hoist may be suspended (refer to Figure 10-10

A-Frame). These devices are intended for vertical lifts only.

Loads shall not be pulled sideways or dragged.

• A-Frames shall be used on level surfaces.

• The height of an A-Frame shall not be adjusted while

under load.

• Manufacturer’s safety recommendations and warning

labels shall be followed.

• Loads should be centered on the I-beam and as low

as possible when moving the A-Frame.

• Some A-Frames are not designed to be moved while

supporting a load (manufacturer’s literature should

be checked).

10.12.2 Pre-Use inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

A-Frames shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• the WLL is stenciled on the device

• no mechanical damage exists that could affect the

structural integrity of the device

• rail stops are in place

• safety locking pins are in place

310
Rigging Tools and Devices

Figure 10-10

A-Frame

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


311

10.13 Jib Cranes

10.13.1 General

Jib cranes consist of a single beam, free to turn on a hinge

or mast (refer to Figure 10-11 Jib Cranes).

• Jib cranes with a permanently attached hoisting

device shall have an annual Periodic Inspection.

• For jib cranes without a permanently attached

hoisting device, the Supervisor of Lift shall ensure a

periodic inspection is performed prior to use.

10.13.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Jib cranes shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• the WLL is stenciled on the device

• rail stops are in place

• attachments to hinges or the mast for, bent, broken

or missing fasteners

• freedom of movement of the hinges or mast

312
Rigging Tools and Devices

Figure 10-11

Jib Cranes

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


313

10.14 Portable Boom Cranes

(Engine Hoists)

10.14.1 General

a Portable hydraulic boom cranes are intended for

industrial use (refer to Figure 10-12 Portable Boom

Cranes). They may be manually operated or powered

with an electric motor.

b The crane mast may be fixed or rotary. Rotary mast

type cranes, even with outriggers, are not to be

approved for use at Bruce power due to instability

problems.

c Loads should not be transported with a portable

boom crane, unless the device is designed for that

purpose.

d The load centre of gravity shall be kept within the

device’s support stability zone.

e Personnel shall not stand on the back of portable

boom cranes.

314
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.14.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Portable boom cranes shall be inspected before use for the

following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• the WLL is marked on the boom for each position

• hydraulic leaks

• damaged chain, wheels and pins

• the condition of the hook and safety latch

Figure 10-12

Portable Boom Cranes

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


315

10.15 Monorail Beams

10.15.1 General

A monorail beam is a structural member designated as a

lifting device.

10.15.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Monorail beams shall be inspected before use for the

following: (refer to Figure 10-13 Monorail)

• Periodic Inspection identification

• the WLL is stenciled on the beam

• rail stops are in place

• no mechanical defects such as cracks, twisting,

bending, bulging

• abrasion damage

Figure 10-13

Monorail

316
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.16 Beam Clamps

10.16.1 General

a Beam clamps are devices used to connect a hoist to

an approved structural member or monorail and have

the following characteristics (refer to Figure 10-14

Beam Clamps):

• if installed correctly, beam clamps provide a secure

anchor point

• beam clamps are available with capacities up to 12

ton with various jaw widths

• beam clamp jaws are designed for a range of flange

widths (i.e. 4 1/2” - 9” flanges)

• most beam clamps are designed for use at 90û to

the beam flange

b Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be

followed.

c Angle (side) loading of clamps or beams shall be

approved by site engineering.

d Beam clamps shall be centered on the flange and shall

be properly seated.

e There shall be no obstructions between the flange lip

and the clamp jaw.

f Beam clamps designed to support pipe runs shall not

be used for rigging.

g Beam clamps shall be appropriate for the flange on

which they are installed, and shall be used within the

specified flange range, otherwise sufficient grip will

not be obtained.

h Beam clamps shall be positive locking devices.


Rigging Tools a nd Devices
317

10.16.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Beam clamps shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• the WLL is marked on the device

• no mechanical damage

• smooth operation

Figure 9-14

Beam Clamps

10.16.3 Beam Clamps vs Pipe Hanger Clamps

A beam clamp is a lifting device used to connect a hoist or a

hoist hook to a beam. A plate clamp performs the same

function for a plate. Beam clamps are also used as a means

of connecting a portable hoist to a beam. It is important to

note that pipe hanger clamps are NOT acceptable as a

means to attach a hoist to a beam.

a Pipe Hanger Clamps are used to connect a pipe

saddle to building steel. In general they are designed

to withstand more-or-less static vertical loads, plus

side loads in both directions. They are designed to a

factor of safety, typically on the order of 1.33 times

the allowable load for the material, as specified under

ANSI B31.1.
318
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.17 Beam Trolleys

10.17.1 General

a Beam trolleys are used on approved structural

members, monorails or jib cranes to allow movement

of a load and have the following characteristics (refer

to Figure 10-15 Beam Trolleys):

• are available in capacities from 1/2 ton to 40 ton

• may be hand operated, chain operated or

electrically driven

b Trolleys shall be suitable for the beam type and size.

c Light duty trolleys should not be used for rigging

applications.

d Rail stops shall be in place and shall be suitable for

the trolley.

e Original equipment manufacturer replacement parts

shall be used to repair trolleys.

f Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be

followed.

320
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.17.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Beam trolleys shall be inspected before use for the

following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• the WLL is marked on the device

• no mechanical damage

• damaged or worn wheels

• a bent or twisted hook plate

• the hook plate is centered under the beam

• the beam trolley operates freely after installation

Figure 10-15

Beam Trolleys

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


321

10.18 Plate Clamps

10.18.1 General

a Plate clamps are available in a number of

configurations depending on the application (refer to

Figure 10-16 Plate Clamps).

b Only models which manually lock into the closed

position shall be used.

c Vertical lifting clamps shall not be used to move

horizontal plates, and horizontal lifting clamps shall

not be used to move vertical plates (except when

changing plate orientation).

d Plate clamps shall not be used on a tapered flange of

a structural shape unless it is designed for that

purpose.

e C-clamps shall not be used in place of plate clamps.

f Plate clamps shall not be used as anchor points. Only

components specifically designed as anchors shall be

used for that purpose.

g Plate clamp WLL and size ratings shall be marked on

the plate clamp body as well as the Manufacturer’s

name or logo. The capacity shall be reduced if the

gripping surface is greasy or dirty, manufacturer’s

catalogues may be consulted for details.

h When lifting with plate clamps, the following safety

considerations shall be adhered to:

• correct clamp, size and rated capacity shall be used

• large capacity clamps should not be used to lift

light loads

• clamps shall be locked closed before lifting a load


322
Rigging Tools and Devices

• two or more clamps should be used to balance a

long or flexible load

• slings or shackles should be used between a clamp

and the hoist hook

• only one plate at a time shall be lifted with a

vertical clamp

• personnel shall remain clear when lifting or moving

a load

NOTE

Refer to Manufacturer’s operating instructions.

i Plate clamps shall be positive locking devices.

j Pipe hanger clamps are not acceptable as a means to

attach a hoist to a beam.

Figure 10-16

Plate Clamps

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


323

10.18.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Plate clamps shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• gross mechanical damage

• evidence of grinding, welding or modification

• proper operation of the clamp, pivoting shackle and

locking device

324
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.19 Tackle Blocks and Snatch Blocks

10.19.1 General

a A block and tackle using synthetic or wire rope

provides mechanical advantage.

b Snatch blocks provide no mechanical advantage and

are intended for infrequent use with slow line speeds.

c WLL may be affected by wear, misuse, overloading,

corrosion, deformation or alteration.

d Blocks are intended for tension or pull. Side loading

shall be avoided, as it exerts additional force or

loading which the blocks are not designed to

accommodate.

e Fiber core wire ropes should not be used for this

application.

f Blocks do not have brakes.

10.19.2 Snatch Blocks

a Size is determined by the outside diameter of the

sheave (refer to Figure 10-17 Snatch Block). The

WLL shall be determined from manufacturer’s

literature and is affected by bearing size, sheave size

and block construction. It will depend on the

capacity of the blocks, the safe working load of the

rope, the load added by friction, and the load

reduction due to the ratio of sheave diameter to rope

diameter.

b Snatch blocks are used to change direction of lifting

or hauling lines. The load on a block depends on the

tension in the line, and the angle through which the

line is turned.
Rigging Tools a nd Devices
325

c A crane must never be used to drag a load sideways.

In cases where the crane must be used to pull load, a

snatch block shall be used to change the direction of

force.

Figure 10-17

Snatch Block

10.19.3 Rope Blocks

Multi-sheave tackle blocks come in a wide range of

strengths and sheave sizes.

a Tackle arrangement shall be designed to suit the

application by a competent person.

b Total load on a block (load plus pull force on line)

shall not exceed the block’s WLL.

c Ropes have separate WLLs, which shall not be

exceeded.

d Synthetic rope blocks should be chosen with a shell

length of eight times rope diameter.

e One method of reeving blocks is illustrated in

Figure 10-18 Common Reeving of Blocks.

326
Rigging Tools and Devices

Figure 10-18

Common Reeving of Blocks

10.19.4 Parts of Line

CAUTION

Consult engineering before lifting loads with a rope

block.

a Mechanical advantage increases as “parts of line”

increase. Parts of line is determined by counting the

number of lines just above the running block. Figure

10-18 Common Reeving of Blocks, shows examples

of four, five and six parts of line.

b Sheaves in a system of blocks rotate at different rates

of speed, and have different loads. When in use, line

tension is not equal throughout the system.


Rigging Tools a nd Devices
327

c Anti-friction bearings require 5% to 30% less pull

than bronze bearings. Bearing types should not be

mixed in any single block system.

d Table 10-1 Crosby 2005 Sheave Bearing Factors is

used to calculate parts of line required based on the

type of sheaves used in a block system.

e Depending on circumstances, one of three variables

may need to be calculated (examples are shown after

Table 10-1):

• Parts of Line: the number of lines just above the

running block

• Line Pull: the force required to perform the lift

• Lift Capacity: the amount of load that can be lifted

(WLL)

328
Rigging Tools and Devices

Table 10-1

Crosby 2005 Sheave Bearing Factors

Parts of Line Factor A


Factor B

Bronze bushed Sleeves


Anti-friction Bearing Sheaves

1 0.96 0.98

2 1.87 1.94

3 2.75 2.88

4 3.59 3.81

5 4.39 4.71

6 5.16 5.60

7 5.90 6.47

8 6.60 7.32

9 7.27 8.16

10 7.91 8.98

11 8.52 9.79

12 9.11 10.60

13 9.68 11.40

14 10.20 12.10

15 10.70 12.90

16 11.20 13.60

17 11.70 14.30

18 12.20 15.00

19 12.60 15.70

20 13.00 16.40

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


329

f Example questions to illustrate calculation of; Parts

of Line, Line Pull and Lift Capacity:

1 How many “Parts of Line” are required to lift a

6,000 lb load with a line pull of 1,800 lb using a

bronze bushing block?

Step 1: Determine which Factor to use from Table 10-1,

based on bearing type

Step 2: Factor A = Load ÷ Line Pull

Step 3: Factor A = 6,000 lb ÷ 1,800 lb

Step 4: Factor A = 3.33

Step 5: The next highest value after 3.33 in Table 10-1,

Factor A column is 3.59

Step 6: “Parts of Line” column in the same row as

Factor A for 3.59 is 4

Answer: 4 Parts of Line should be used for this lift.

2 How much “Line Pull” is required to lift an 8,000 lb

load with 6 Parts of Line using an anti-friction

bearing block?

Step 1: Determine which Factor to use from Table 10-1,

based on bearing type

Step 2: Line Pull = Load ÷ 6 Parts of Line for Factor B

Step 3: Line Pull = 8,000 lb ÷ 5.60

Step 4: Line Pull = 1,429 lb

Answer: 1,429 lb Line Pull is required to lift an 8,000 lb

load with 6 Parts of Line.

330
Rigging Tools and Devices

3 What is the “Lift Capacity” of 8 parts of line, with a

1,500 lb Line Pull, using an anti-friction bearing

block?

Step 1: Determine which Factor to use from Table 10-1

based on bearing type

Step 2: Lift Capacity = Line Pull x 8 Parts of Line for

Factor B

Step 3: Lift Capacity = 1,500 x 7.32

Step 4: Lift Capacity = 10,580 lb

Answer: 10,980 lb load may be lifted with 8 Parts of Line

and a 1,500 lb Line Pull.

10.19.5 Wire Rope Strength Efficiency

Bending wire rope reduces rope strength (Refer to Section

9.0 for D/d ratio details). To select a proper sheave,

Table 10-2 Effect of Bend Radius on Wire Rope, is used to

determine the effect of bend radius on rope strength. For

example, to determine the strength efficiency of 1/2”

diameter wire rope using a 10” diameter sheave:

• D/d Ratio = Sheave Diameter ÷ Wire Rope Diameter

• D/d Ratio = 10” ÷ 1/2”

• D/d Ratio = 20:1

• Refer to Table 10-2 Effect of Bend Radius on Wire

Rope for row with D/d Ratio 20:1, then across to

strength efficiency of 91%.

• Wire rope strength is reduced to 91% of

manufacturer’s catalog WLL value.

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


331

Table 10-2

Effect of Bend Radius on Wire Rope

D/d Ratio Strength Efficiency


D/d Ratio Strength Efficiency

Compared to WLL
Compared to WLL

1:1 50% 10:1 86%

2:1 65% 15:1 89%

4:1 75% 20:1 91%

6:1 79% 30:1 93%

8:1 83% 40:1 95%


10.19.6 Loads on Blocks

a The WLL for blocks indicates the maximum load

that shall be exerted on a block and connecting

fittings. The total load value may be different from

the weight being lifted or pulled by a hoisting or

hauling system.

b Single sheave blocks used to change a load line

direction may be subjected to total loads greater than

the weight being lifted or pulled. Total load value on

a block varies with the angle between incoming and

departing lines.

c Table 10-3 Angularity Factors, provides factors to be

multiplied by line pull to obtain the total load on a

block.

d The total load being imposed shall be determined for

each block in the system.

e The following examples show how to determine Line

Pull and Total Load on each block for a 1,000 lb

load and 2 Parts of Line using bronze bushed

sheaves.

332
Rigging Tools and Devices

1 To calculate Line Pull:

• Determine which Factor to use from Table 10-1,

based on bearing type

• Line pull = Load ÷ 2 Parts of Line for Factor A

• Line Pull = 1,000 lb ÷ 1.87

• Line Pull = 535 lb

• 535 lb Line Pull is required to lift a 1,000 lb load

with 2 Parts of Line.

2 To calculate Total Load on travelling block C:

• Total Load on C = Line Pull x Angularity Factor

(AF) from Table 10-3

• Total Load on C = 535 lb x 2.0 (0° factor)

• Total Load on C = 1,070 lb.

3 To calculate Total Load on stationary block D:

• Total Load on D = Line Pull x AF in Table 10-3 +

Dead end load (1/2 total load)

• Total Load on D = 535 lb x 1.87 (factor 40° angle)

+ 500 lb (dead end load)

• Total Load on D = 1,501 lb.

4 To calculate Total Load on stationary block E:

• Total Load on E = Line Pull x AF in Table 10-3

• Total Load on E = 535 lb x 0.84 (factor 130°

angle)

• Total Load on E = 449 lb.

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


333

5 To calculate Total Load on stationary block F:

• Total Load on F = Line Pull x AF in Table 9-3

• Total Load on F = 535 lb x 1.41 (factor 90° angle)

• Total Load on F = 754 lb.

Table 10-3

Angularity Factors

Angle Factor
Angle Factor
Angle Factor

0° 2.00
60° 1.73
130° 0.84

10° 1.99
70° 1.64
135° 0.76

20° 1.97
80° 1.53
140° 0.68

30° 1.93
90° 1.41
150° 0.52

40° 1.87
100° 1.29
160° 0.35

45° 1.84
110° 1.15
170° 0.17

50° 1.81
120° 1.00
180° 0.00
10.19.7 Load on Structure

The total load exerted on a supporting structure and

anchorage shall be considered, and may be calculated as

follows:

Total Load on Structure

= Load being lifted + Line Pull x Angularity factor

(from Table 10-3)

Refer to Section 11.1, Fixed Lifting Points on Equipment

and Structures for details.

334
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.19.8 Groove Size

a Consideration shall be given to groove diameter of

sheaves (Figure 10-19 Rope to Sheave Matching).

When groove diameter is too large, ropes will not be

properly supported and may flatten or distort, which

increases fatigue in the individual wires and may

cause early rope failure.

b When a sheave groove diameter is too small for a

rope, operating tension may force the rope into the

groove. In this situation, the rotation of the sheave is

restricted, and the rope may be subjected to abrasive

wear. This condition may arise when new ropes are

installed over old sheaves.

c Consult engineering before applying a load in excess

of 1,000 lb to building steel.

Figure 10-19

Rope to Sheave Matching


Rigging Tools a nd Devices
335

10.19.9 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Blocks shall be inspected before use for the following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• sheaves for uneven wear, grooving, flat spots, free

wheeling bearings

• broken or deformed flanges and cracks

• premature wear, damaged or broken wires in the rope

installation

• wear in pins or axles, rope grooves, side plates,

bushings or bearings, and fittings

• permanent deformation in side plates, pins, axles,

fitting attachment points, trunnions, etc

• loose bolts, nuts, and other locking methods

• pins retained by snap rings for missing or loose rings

• sheave pin nuts for proper positioning

• clearance between hooks or shackles to the swivel

case

• hooks, including deformation or corrosion of the

hook and nut threads

• welded side plates for weld corrosion or weld

cracking

336
Rigging Tools and Devices

10.20 Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices

new to Bruce Power

a Any below the hook lifting devices not previously in

use at Bruce Power and not referred to in this

handbook or BP-PROC-00587, Inspection

Requirements for Rigging, Lifting and Material

Handling Equipment, require the approval of the

RSE for Cranes and Hoists.

b The device shall be inspected according to the

provisions in the current version of ASME B30.20,

Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices until a process has

been established at Bruce Power.

c Records shall be kept on whatever existing form

most closely matches the device as determined by the

RSE.

Rigging Tools a nd Devices


337

10.21 Shutdown and Storage

When the user of a hoisting device has completed the job,

the following shall be completed:

• Raise hooks to a safe park position if the lifting

device is left in place.

• For electric or air operated hoisting devices, place

controls in the OFF position.

• De-energize the hoist, and isolate as appropriate.

• Return hand operated lifting devices to proper

storage areas.

• Return A-Frame, davits or portable floor cranes to a

designated safe storage area.

• Finally, make a visual inspection of lifting equipment

and work area.

338
Rigging Tools and Devices

11.0 Anchor Points

and Non-Standard Lifting Points

11.1 Fixed Lifting Points on Equipment

and Structures

11.1.1 General

11.1.2 Pre-Use Inspection

11.2 Anchor Points

11.3 Building Structural Steel

11.3.1 General

11.3.2 Pre-Use Inspection

11.4 Floor Grating

11.4.1 General

11.4.2 Pre-Use Inspection

11.5 Scaffolding to Support

Temporary Lifting Beams

11.5.1 General

11.5.2 Pre-Use Inspection

11.6 System Piping

Anchor Points and Non-sta ndard Lifting Points


339

11.1 Fixed Lifting Points

on Equipment and Structures

11.1.1 General

Process equipment such as pumps, motors, valves, etc. may

have designated lifting points permanently attached by the

manufacturer or Bruce Power.

a Welded lugs require engineering approval and shall

be installed by a qualified welder.

b New lifting points shall have a documented initial

inspection and a WLL before use.

c Site engineering shall be contacted if lifting points or

WLL are unknown.

d To prevent side loading, rigging shall be attached to a

lug in line with the lifting plane.

e If hoisting is not vertical, the lift shall be assessed to

evaluate the increased load on the lifting lug due to

sling angles, and site engineering approval may be

required.

f A periodic inspection on a fixed lifting point, may be

performed by a competent person on the crew as per

BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment.

11.1.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

340
Anchor Points and Non-sta nda rd Lifting Points

11.2 Anchor Points

Hoists, winches, tirfors, and other rigging devices require

secure anchor points.

a Anchors may be overhead, in floors, or at lateral

points in structures.

b Beams, beam clamps, beam trolleys, welded lugs,

slings or floor anchors may be used.

c The load weight and required strength of the anchor

point shall be known.

d Anchor points shall have site engineering approval

and shall be labeled with a WLL.

e When using a snatch block or a block and tackle, the

load on the anchor point will be greater than the

weight of the load by the amount of pull force

required to pull on the lead line.

• As mechanical advantage increases, the load on the

anchor point decreases.

• To avoid overloading, the load on the anchor point

shall be calculated prior to the lift.

• Lead line load and the load on the anchor point

may be calculated as follows:

1 Example 1: 800 pound load, using snatch block

(no mechanical advantage):

• Lead Line Load = Load ÷ Parts of line at the load

= 800 lb ÷ 1

= 800 pounds

• Load on the Anchor = Load + Lead Line Load

= 800 lb + 800 lb

= 1,600 pounds

Anchor Points and Non-sta ndard Lifting Points


341

2 Example 2: 800 pound load, using block and

tackle (mechanical advantage of 4):

• Lead Line Load = Load ÷ Parts of line at the load

= 800 lb ÷ 4

= 200 pounds.

• Load on the Anchor = Load + Lead Line Load

= 800 lb + 200 lb

= 1,000 pounds.

In the examples above, the load on the anchor point

was reduced from 1,600 pounds to 1,000 pounds to

lift the same 800 pound load, when a block and

tackle was used rather than a snatch block.

342
Anchor Points and Non-sta nda rd Lifting Points

11.3 Building Structural Steel

11.3.1 General

When using building structural beams as an anchor point

during lifting, the following applies:

a Engineering approval is required.

b Rigging attachments to a structure shall not affect the

structure permanently by welding, cutting, drilling,

deforming or any other alteration.

c Only structural beams supported at both ends shall

be used for lifting. The Supervisor of Lift shall ensure

approval has been obtained.

d Beams shall only be loaded vertically, without side

loading. Appropriate beam clamps and trolleys may

be used. When a sling is used to attach rigging to a

beam, a double wrap basket or choker hitch should

be used and softeners shall be used.

e Slings may be used to anchor rigging to a structure as

follows (refer to Figure 11-1 Slings):

1 A double wrap basket hitch should be used for the

following reasons:

• two sling legs support the load

• the load is distributed around the structure

• it is less prone to slippage than a single choker

or single basket hitch

2 Slings shall be long enough to avoid low sling

angles.

3 Softeners shall be used around sharp edges.

Anchor Points and Non-sta ndard Lifting Points


343

Figure 11-1

Slings

f Without prior engineering approval, the following

shall NOT be used for rigging purposes:

• cantilever beams or roof trusses

• structural angle iron, channel or diagonal bracing

• supplementary or secondary steel beams

• columns, or posts with side loads


344
Anchor Points and Non-sta nda rd Lifting Points

11.3.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

When used as an anchor point, structural steel shall be

inspected before use for the following:

• limits defined by engineering have been followed

• distortion, cracked welds or loose bolts

• the hoist is securely attached to the beam using

appropriate rigging methods

• the WLL of the beam is equal to or greater than the

hoist WLL (conditions for an exception to this

requirement are listed in Section 3.0, Rigging and

Lifting Practices)

Anchor Points and Non-sta ndard Lifting Points


345

11.4 Floor Grating

11.4.1 General

a Rigging suspended from a sling attached to a pipe

placed on floor grating shall not be used for hoisting

without site engineering approval.

b An example of a lifting beam to allow hoisting from

below floor grating is illustrated in Figure 11-2,

Example of Lifting Beam Used Through Floor

Grating.

c The lifting device is placed above the grating and is

supported by the grating support beams.

d A movable lifting lug may be used to situate the

rigging equipment over the load.

e Lifting devices shall be approved by site engineering

and the WLL shall be stenciled on the device.

f The WLL of the hoist shall not exceed that of the

beam (conditions for an exception to this

requirement are listed in Section 3.0 Rigging and

Lifting Practices).

g Horizontal structural beams shall have a combined

WLL greater than the WLL of the lifting device.

h Engineering approval is required.

346
Anchor Points and Non-sta nda rd Lifting Points

11.4.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

The lifting device shall be inspected before use for the

following:

• Periodic Inspection identification

• the device identification number and WLL are

stenciled on the beam

• no distortion, cracked welds or loose bolts exist

• the rigging is securely attached to the lifting beam

• the beam is level and has firm footing

Figure 11-2

Example of Lifting Beam Used Through Floor Grating

Anchor Points and Non-sta ndard Lifting Points


347

11.5 Scaffolding to Support Temporary

Lifting Beams

11.5.1 General

a Scaffolds used for rigging purposes shall be erected in

accordance with approved site engineered drawings.

b If a scaffold deviates from approved lifting scaffold

drawings, the scaffold tag shall be authorized by site

engineering signature.

c Scaffold tags shall identify the scaffold WLL and

shall identify the approved rigging method (whether a

beam trolley, beam clamp or a sling wrapped around

the beam is to be used).

d The WLL of the hoist shall not exceed the WLL on

the scaffold tag.

e The WLL is not required to be stenciled on the

scaffold lifting beam since the WLL depends on the

scaffold frame and beam configuration, which may

be different for each scaffold erection.

f Lifting beams used in scaffold frames shall not be

used for any other purpose.

g Scaffold tags shall note unusual or out of the

ordinary scaffold features.

h Damaged scaffold shall be reported to the Supervisor

of Lift who shall contact the supervisor responsible

for scaffolding. Damaged scaffold shall be tagged and

removed from service.

348
Anchor Points and Non-sta nda rd Lifting Points

11.5.2 Pre-Use Inspection

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

Lifting scaffolds shall be inspected before use for the

following:

• inspection due date is identified on the scaffold tag

• scaffold WLL is identified on the scaffold tag

• the scaffold tag is filled out and signed by a scaffold

inspector

• if a beam trolley is used, adequate end stops are in

place on the lifting beam

• a clear path exists for load travel

• if the scaffold deviates from approved lifting scaffold

drawings, the tag is authorized by site engineering

signature

• the scaffold tag identifies whether a beam trolley,

beam clamp or sling is to be used to attach the hoist

Anchor Points and Non-sta ndard Lifting Points


349

11.6 System Piping

System piping shall not be used for hoisting and rigging

without site engineering approval. Alternative rigging

arrangements should be investigated.

350
Anchor Points and Non-sta nda rd Lifting Points

12.0 Travelling Overhead Bridge and

Gantry Cranes

12.1 Crane Configurations

12.2 Restrictions to Access and Operation of

Cranes

12.3 Pre-Use Inspection and Operational

Checks

12.3.1 Pendant Controlled Hoists

12.3.2 Cab Operated Hoists

12.4 Operation and Use of Cranes

12.4.1 General Operation and Use

12.4.2 Operation of Resistor-Controlled Wound-Rotor

Motor Driven Cranes

12.5 Shutdown Procedure

12.6 Emergency Procedures

12.7 Principal Causes of Crane Wear and

Failure

Operator - APPROVE the Crane operation

A Annual inspection tags (E stop is activated)

P Physical condition of the crane

(rails, stops, buttons, etc.)

P Power on

(ensure crane numbers and breaker match)

R Buttons will Return to neutral

(E stop in power on)

O Operate, check the up button makes it go up

check N, S, E, W

V Verify the both limits and brakes 2 ways

E Examine the cables operation and

hook/block assembly
Travelling Overhea d Bridge a nd Ga ntry Cra nes
351

12.1 Crane Configurations

a Overhead travelling cranes consist principally of a

pair of runway rails, a single-girder or multiple-girder

bridge that spans a runway and a hoist(s) mounted

on a trolley(s) that moves along the bridge girder.

b Most overhead travelling cranes are electrically

powered but some are manually operated. Operator

control cabs may be provided, or a crane may be

controlled from the floor with a pendant control or,

in some cases, remotely by radio.

c Overhead cranes are top-running or underhung,

depending on whether the bridge end trucks travel on

top of the runway beams or along its lower flange.

There are variations within each type, depending on

whether a single girder or multiple-girder bridge is

used.

d Top-running cranes are supported from building

columns (refer to Figure 12-1 Typical Overhead

Electric Travelling Crane).

e Gantry cranes travel along rails that are at ground

level (refer to Figure 12-2 Gantry Crane).

f Under hung cranes are often supported from roof

trusses (refer to Figure 12-3 Underhung Pendent

Crane).

g This section also applies to monorail hoists which are

usually less complex but share the same basic

characteristics as bridge and gantry cranes.

352
Travelling Overhead Bridge and Ga ntry Cra nes

Figure 12-1

Typical Overhead Electric Travelling Crane


Travelling Overhea d Bridge a nd Ga ntry Cra nes
353

Figure 12-2

Gantry Crane

Figure 12-3

Underhung Pendent Crane

354
Travelling Overhead Bridge and Ga ntry Cra nes

12.2 Restrictions to Access and

Operation of Cranes

a Defective cranes shall not be operated.

b Cranes shall be operated only by:

• designated and competent operators

• learners under the supervision of a designated and

competent operator

• qualified crane inspectors moving unloaded cranes

for testing, verification, and maintenance purposes

c No other personnel shall operate a crane or enter a

crane cab or pulpit without the knowledge and

consent of the operator or the Supervisor of Lift.

Travelling Overhea d Bridge a nd Ga ntry Cra nes


355

12.3 Pre-Use Inspection and

Operational Checks

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

a Logbooks and inspection records shall be kept for

examination by the Ministry of Labour in accordance

with OHSA regulations. The periodic inspection of

cranes together with a suitable log book, form a

permanent record of crane inspection, servicing,

replacement of components, and overhauls.

b Operators shall look and listen for potential crane

problems but shall not be exposed to hazards in

order to perform these inspections. It may not be

possible to see the entire wire rope or drum and the

condition of rollers, lubrication, collectors, shoes or

bars, etc.

c Operators shall not attempt to make repairs unless

competent and authorized to do so.

d Prior to using a pendant controlled hoist, or a cab

operated hoist, the crane operator shall perform a

pre-use inspection and make a crane log entry to

record the inspection and inspection results:

• For pendant controlled hoists, crane operator shall

follow step 12.3.1

• For cab operated hoists, crane operator shall

follow step 12.3.2

e If problems are noted during the pre-use inspection,

the operator shall enter details in the crane log and

notify the Supervisor of Lift.

356
Travelling Overhead Bridge and Ga ntry Cra nes

f If a defect affects the safe operation of a crane, or if

an overload relay trips, the operator shall remove the

crane from service following site procedures:

1 Land the load if a lift was in progress

2 Set controls to OFF position.

3 Open and lock out local disconnect switch.

4 Hang tag (i.e. caution tag, or plant status control

tag, etc).

5 Make a log book entry clearly outlining the

problem.

6 Notify the work group supervisor, who shall

contact the Crane Maintenance Crew.

12.3.1 Pendant Controlled Hoists

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

a Check the following:

• crane availability

• log book

• Periodic Inspection date

• tag (i.e. caution tags etc)

b Visually check the following

(where applicable):

• location and position of local disconnect switch

• no evidence of oil leaks (on floor under hoist)

Travelling Overhea d Bridge a nd Ga ntry Cra nes


357

• rail stops in place on bridge and trolley

• bridge, trolley runway obstructions or foreign

material

• electrical collector shoes and bars in good shape

• bridge and trolley components and wheels

• wire rope cable wrapped on drum properly

• cable end connections and wire rope for damage

• hook for damage, operation of swivel

• hook block and safety latch

• crane capacity

• function labels for operator controls

c Ensure area below is clear and test operate the

following (where applicable):

• emergency stop button

• smooth, quiet hoist drive speeds and brake

operation

• hoist drum wire rope spooling

• audible bridge travel warning alarm is operational

• smooth, quiet bridge drive and brake operation

• smooth, quiet trolley drive and brake operation

• pendant controls return to neutral position

• minimum of 3 wraps of cable left on drum

• hoist upper limit switch

• hoist lower limit switch (if working at the elevation

the lower limit is set to operate)


358
Travelling Overhead Bridge and Ga ntry Cra nes

12.3.2 Cab Operated Hoists

a Check the following:

• crane availability

• log book

• Periodic Inspection date

• tags (i.e. caution tags, etc.)

• position of bridge for safe access

• access warning light indication (if equipped)

b Visually check the following

(where applicable):

• location and position of local disconnect switch

• no evidence of oil leaks (on floor under hoist)

• rail stops in place on bridge and trolley

• bridge, trolley runway obstructions or foreign

material

• electrical collector shoes and bars in good shape

• major components for no obvious abnormalities

• wire rope cable wrapped on drum properly

• cable end connections and wire rope for damage

• location and condition of controlled descent device

(set up and ready)

• evidence of coupling, bearing or other mechanical

parts loosened by vibration

• safety guards and foot walk (bent, broken, or lost)


Travelling Overhea d Bridge a nd Ga ntry Cra nes
359

• cab for general housekeeping

• location and condition of fire extinguisher

• bridge trap door is properly closed

• bridge and trolley components and wheels

• hook for damage, operation of swivel

• hook block and safety latch

• crane capacity

• function labels for operator controls

c Ensure area below is clear and test operate the

following (where applicable):

• controls in neutral position before energizing panel

• emergency stop button

• smooth, quiet hoist drive speeds and brake

operation

• hoist drum wire rope spooling

• audible bridge travel warning alarm is operational

• smooth, quiet bridge drive speeds and brake

operation

• smooth, quiet trolley drive speeds and brake

operation

• pendant controls return to neutral position

• minimum of 3 wraps of cable left on drum

• smooth, quiet main hook drive and brake

operation

• hydraulic foot brake firm


360
Travelling Overhead Bridge and Ga ntry Cra nes

• smooth, quiet auxiliary hook drive and brake

operation

• auxiliary hook upper limit switch

• main hook upper limit switch

• auxiliary hook lower limit switch (if working at

the elevation the lower limit is set to operate)

• main hook lower limit switch (if working at the

elevation the lower limit is set to operate)

Travelling Overhea d Bridge a nd Ga ntry Cra nes


361

12.4 Operation and Use of Cranes

12.4.1 General Operation and use

In addition to information contained in this section, crane

operators shall observe practices outlined in sections 2.0,

Personnel Requirements, 3.0, Rigging and Lifting Practices

and 4.0 General Craning Considerations.

WARNING

A hanging lanyard of a fall arrest system may expose

crane operators or maintenance personnel to the hazard

of being caught in rotating equipment.

a Personnel should enter and exit cranes using proper

boarding procedures. If personnel are required to be

exposed to any of the following hazards, a fall arrest

system or travel restraint system shall be used:

• any unprotected area of the crane

• a rusted or deteriorated catwalk or platform

• where collision between two cranes is possible

(must be identified in the JSA and Form-12293,

Safe Lift Form)

b Two or more cranes on the same runway should be

kept at least 9 m (30 ft) apart. If cranes must operate

closer, operators and supervisors shall take extra

precautions to avoid contact.

c A crane should not be permitted to bump another

crane or end stops.

d If contact with end stops or another crane is

required, it shall be made with extreme caution. The

operator shall do so with particular care for the

safety of persons on or below the cranes, and only

after ensuring personnel on the other crane are aware

of the planned contact.


362
Travelling Overhead Bridge and Ga ntry Cra nes

e When a duplex hook (double saddle hook) is used, a

double sling arrangement shall be used to ensure that

the load is equally divided over both saddles of the

hook. Some duplex hooks do not have safety latches.

In this case, site engineering or the manufacturer’s

recommendations shall be followed.

f Appropriate procedures shall be established and

followed for cranes with multiple control stations or

control modes.

g While hoisting, there shall always be three wraps of

cable left on the crane drum.

h If the electric power to a crane is disrupted,

controllers shall be placed in the OFF position until

power is restored.

i Load limit or overload devices shall not be used to

measure loads being lifted. These are safety devices

and are not to be used as operating controls.

j Travel limits are safety devices and shall not be used

as operating controls. The operator must know

where the load is at all times and be in control of it.

k If the crane fails to respond correctly, stop operation,

put the crane in a safe state (i.e. put the load down

where possible), open the power switch and lock it

open. Place a Caution Tag then call the Supervisor of

the Lift.

Travelling Overhea d Bridge a nd Ga ntry Cra nes


363

l The operator should check frequently to see that the

crane is square with the runway rails by lining up

with the rail tops. If the crane is out of square, the

operator should apply power for travel motion

(without a load on the crane and with the trolley at

the end of the bridge where the wheel is away from

the rail stop). The drive wheel at one end of the

crane will then slip on the rail while the other rolls

up to the rail stop.

m Cranes should not be side-loaded. Where it is

unavoidable, engineering shall be contacted.

364
Travelling Overhead Bridge and Ga ntry Cra nes

12.4.2 Operation of Resistor-Controlled

Wound-Rotor Motor Driven Cranes

Most large overhead cranes at Bruce power are driven by

wound-rotor motors controlled by resistors. This includes

all cab-operated cranes except the Bruce A SIFB 100T flask

crane. To control speed, resistance to the motor is adjusted.

The resistors heat up as a result. This heating can cause

damage not only to the resistors but also to nearby

components which control the direction and speed of the

crane.

• The hoists on such cranes shall be operated in the

highest speed that it is safe to use.

• The hoist controls must be allowed to cool off

regularly. Under no circumstances shall a hoist be

operated in the first speed for more than one minute.

• If the hoist must be used in a speed lower than 3 it

should be operated for 30 seconds on and 120

seconds off.

• The hoist shall not be “plugged”: that is rapidly

switching from up to down.

• The load shall not be inched excessively. If necessary,

land the load with chainfalls or come-alongs.

Travelling Overhea d Bridge a nd Ga ntry Cra nes


365

12.5 Shutdown Procedure

Prior to leaving a crane, the operator shall perform the

following:

1 Land the load and raise all hooks to the normal

storage position.

2 Park the crane at an approved, designated location.

3 Place all controls in the OFF position, and stow

pendant control (if equipped).

4 De-energize the crane by opening either the local

disconnect or main disconnect.

5 For cranes on outside runways, set the brake and

anchor to prevent crane movement.

6 Visually check the crane and surrounding area.

366
Travelling Overhead Bridge and Ga ntry Cra nes

12.6 Emergency Procedures

Approved procedures shall be in place to ensure emergency

situations can be adequately communicated and provisions

exist to affect a safe and effective egress from the crane cab

if required in an emergency situation.

Travelling Overhea d Bridge a nd Ga ntry Cra nes


367

12.7 Principal Causes of Crane Wear

and Failure

Premature wear or damage to a crane may be caused by any

of the following:

• sudden starting and stopping loads

• swinging or jerking loads

• overloading a crane (any load in excess of rated

capacity)

• lack of lubrication

• side pulling or dragging loads

• excessive inching

• plugging of motors (using the reverse direction of an

electric motor as a brake)

• accelerating the hoist before slack is taken out of the

cables or slings

• running a hook into the upper limit switch (other

than for testing)

• improper or severe use of hydraulic bridge brakes

• running a crane or trolley hard into its end stops

• failure to address maintenance issues

368
Travelling Overhead Bridge and Ga ntry Cra nes

13.0 Road Mobile, Rough Terrain and

Crawler Cranes

13.1 General

13.2 Types and Configurations of Cranes

13.3 Setup

13.4 Crane Capacity

13.4.1 Determining Net Capacity

13.4.2 Conditions Affecting Crane Capacity

13.5 Overhauling Weights and Swivels

13.6 Planning Crane Lifts

13.7 Planning Dual Lifts

13.8 Moving and Refueling Mobile Cranes

13.9 Warning Notices

13.10 Soil Bearing Capacity

13.11 Crane Inspection

13.12 Rental and Contractor Cranes

13.12.1 Rental Crane

13.12.2 Contractor’s Crane

13.13 Work Platforms on Crane Booms

13.14 Pre-Use Inspections And Operational

Checks For Mobile Cranes

13.15 Mobile Crane Operation

13.16 Shut Down Procedure

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


369

13.1 General

a This section shall be used in conjunction with

Section 4.0 of this handbook, General Craning

Considerations.

b A copy of the manufacturer’s manual for the mobile

crane being used shall be available at the work site,

preferably with the crane.

c Any mobile crane with a capacity greater than 8 tons

must be operated by an operator certified as a

Hoisting Engineer by the Province of Ontario under

the Trades Qualification and Apprenticeship Act,

O.Reg 631/94 s.3.

d Any mobile crane with a charted capacity of less than

8 tons and a correctly fitted load moment indicator.

or load limiter that will prevent the device from

lifting any load in excess of 8 tons may be used by a

competent worker trained in its use.

e When planning a lift with a mobile crane (regardless

of capacity) the operator shall be selected based on

the complexity of the lift. This means that for a

difficult lift the mobile crane should be operated by a

licensed operator regardless of capacity.

f Any machine such as a forklift, backhoe or bulldozer

that is being used to lift a suspended load shall be

treated (and operated) as a crane.

370
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

13.2 Types and Configurations of Cranes

a Figure 13-1 Lattice Boom Crane, and Figure 13-2

Telescopic Boom Crane, show parts of typical lattice

boom and telescoping boom mobile cranes.

Figure 13-1

Lattice Boom Crane

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


371

b The following factors shall be considered when

selecting the type of crane to be used:

• The location of the Centre of Gravity (C of G), the

height, width, length and shape of the load. These

factors influence the minimum and maximum

boom length and load radius. Operators should

maintain a clearance of at least 1 metre between

the boom and load.

• The lift height, lift radius, and any known

obstruction through the lift cycle.

• The boom position for the maximum capacity of

mobile truck-mounted cranes is normally over the

rear of the carrier and decreases as the boom is

swung over the side. Cranes may not be designed

to lift over the front, and such lifts shall be avoided

unless the crane capacity for this type of lift is

supplied by the manufacturer.

• Travelling with a suspended load is permissible

with some cranes. Rough terrain and crawler

cranes usually have a “pick and carry” rating.

372
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

Figure 13-2

Telescopic Boom Crane


Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes
373

13.3 Setup

a Before a crane arrives on site, a site survey shall be

completed to ensure the crane has safe access, and if

necessary, sufficient room to be assembled.

b If the ground is not firm enough to support

outriggers or crawler loads, then timber pads, steel

plates or other means to spread the load over a

greater area shall be provided.

c Load charts are based on outriggers being fully

extended and placed centrally on pads, unless

specified by the manufacturer. If this cannot be done

line management shall be consulted.

374
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

13.4 Crane Capacity

a To ensure adequate capacity of a crane, the following

shall be known:

• maximum load radius

• boom length and configuration required (i.e. boom

angle)

• jib length and offset (refer to Figure 13-3 Jib

Length and Offset)

• gross load

• parts of line required

• operating quadrants

• any specific limitations

b Lifting boom-jib combinations are as follows:

• lift from main boom

• lift from main boom with jib attached

• lift from jib

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


375

Figure 13-3

Jib Length and Offset

13.4.1 Determining Net Capacity

a The gross capacity of a crane is shown on

manufacturers’ load charts. The method of

calculating net capacity varies between manufacturers

and requires some study of their literature.

b The following shall be considered when calculating

the net capacity of a jib attachment:

• Manufacturer’s load chart shall be used for the

calculation.
376
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

• Effective weight of the jib as listed by the

manufacturer. The actual weight of the jib shall not

be used since it does not allow for the movement

of the jib.

• The capacity of the jib depends on the structural

capacity of the jib or stability of the crane. Both

shall be calculated and the net capacity shall be the

lower of the two. The method of calculation is

shown on manufacturer’s load charts and in

standard craning texts.

• Only cranes specifically designed to use their boom

and jib simultaneously shall be used in this manner.

13.4.2 Conditions Affecting Crane Capacity

The following factors shall be considered to determine the

WLL of a crane: (refer to Figure 13-4 Safe Working Factors)

a Crane Levelling

• Load chart capacities on outriggers are based on

the crane being level. Prior to any lift, the crane

machinery deck shall be level to within 0.5°

(10 mm/m or about 3/32 in/ft).

• Cranes on tires have separate load charts. Prior to

lifting on tires and crawlers, the crane shall be level

to within the limits specified by the manufacturer.

A spirit level should be used to check that the

crane is level.

• When levelling a crane, check for level in two

directions, 90° apart. If making a series of lifts,

level shall be checked periodically.

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


377

b Radius

• Load charts are based on load radius. An increase

in radius will increase stresses in the crane at high

boom angles (structural range of chart) and reduce

stability of the crane at low boom angles.

• For all lifts, the maximum radius of the lift shall be

known. Mobile crane load charts are based on this

measurement and any errors may substantially

affect stress levels, rated capacity, and crane

stability.

• If a load exceeds 75% of the load-chart capacity

for any boom angle, the crane radius shall be

measured exactly.

• When heavy loads are lifted by boom cranes, the

radius may increase due to compression of the

earth or stretch of the boom suspension lines which

causes the boom to deflect forward. To help

control boom radius, the following steps apply:

1 Operators should initially boom-up to take the

load weight.

2 Lifts shall not be made beyond the boom-tip as

this tends to draw the boom forward.

3 Rotation shall be started and stopped gradually

to avoid side loading the boom.

4 Slow swing speeds shall be used to prevent loads

from swinging beyond the allowable radius.

378
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

Figure 13-4

Safe Working Factors

c Load

• The load on a mobile crane also includes hook

blocks, slings, rigging, etc., and any parts of the

load line not allowed for by the manufacturer.

• For loads above 75% of the rated capacity of the crane

at any radius or boom angle, the load shall be

determined exactly. The lift shall involve site engineering

and may meet the criteria for a Critical Lift.

• The total load on a crane is equal to the static load

plus the dynamic load:

1 The static load is the gross load when stationary.

2 The dynamic load is caused by sudden lifting,

stopping, or swinging.
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes
379

3 The dynamic load may increase the total load by

up to 100%.

4 Smooth crane operation will reduce the dynamic

load.

d Outriggers

• Load chart capacities provided by manufacturers

may be based on outriggers fully or partially

extended or on rubber tires. If a manufacturer’s

load chart for partially extended outriggers does

not exist for the device, outriggers shall not be

partially extended for a lift. Deviations from

manufacturers’ load charts shall have site

engineering approval.

CAUTION

When span blocking or corner blocking is used, an

outrigger float may fail at half of its design load.

• Ground bearing pressure generated by crane

outriggers is high, which will cause soft soil to

deflect or yield, therefore, blocking pads shall be

used under outrigger floats to distribute crane

loads over as large an area as possible.

1 Soil load bearing capacities shall be determined.

(refer to Table 13-1 Approximate Soil Bearing

Values)

2 Two or more pads shall be placed under

outriggers in off-road situations.

3 A minimum of one pad per outrigger shall be

used on pavement or concrete.

4 Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be

followed.
380
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

• A large percentage of a crane and load’s total

weight may be transmitted to one outrigger.

Therefore blocking pads should be fairly rigid,

tightly spaced, and at least three times larger in

area than the float and should completely support

the float.

• Blocking pads shall be level to guarantee a right

angle between the cylinder and float.

e Counterweight

• Manufacturer’s recommendations for

counterweights shall be followed.

f Gantry Height

• Load charts are determined with the crane gantry

in a specified position. The gantry shall not be

lowered as this increases compressive stress on the

boom.

g Boom Foot Mounting

• On a crane provided with more than one boom

foot mounting position, the position specified on

load charts shall be used.

h Boom Stops

• Boom stops shall be installed and be operative.

When operating at high boom angles, a sudden

release of the load may otherwise throw the boom

backward.

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


381

i Multi-Part Load Line Reeving

• Rigging should be symmetrical and the lines should

not cross.

• Boom tips shall not be reeved to take a load on

one side, since this twists the boom (refer to Figure

13-5 Examples of Balanced Reeving Methods).

j Side Loading

• Side loading is extremely dangerous. It may be

caused by erratic swinging and stopping, incorrect

levelling of the crane, eccentric reeving, wind

effects on the load and boom surfaces, or lifting a

load that is not plumb.

• Cranes shall be positioned and operated to

minimize side loading on all lifts regardless of

rated chart capacity.

• On any load above 75% of the rated chart

capacity of a crane, reeving of the boom tip and

load block shall be balanced.

k Jerking and Swinging

• Erratic operation of a crane shall be avoided. Rapid

acceleration or deceleration when lifting, lowering or

swinging a load, increases stresses in load-supporting

components and reduces stability of a crane.

Production operations such as concrete placing shall

be carried out at a de-rated crane capacity.

l Pile Driving

• When cranes are used for pile driving, the normal

methods of calculating load and radius shall be

observed.
382
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

• Cranes equipped with hydraulic booms shall not be

used for pile driving, since the boom cylinder may

be damaged.

• To prevent side loading, piles shall not be dragged

with a crane.

m Weather Conditions

• The effect of wind on a mobile or gantry crane is

not allowed for in the load charts. Mobile cranes

are particularly affected by wind pressure on the

load. Manufacturer limitations shall be observed,

where available.

• Many types of steel lose their elastic properties and

become more brittle at lower temperatures, making

them more likely to fail from stress concentrations

at minor defects such as nicks and under load

shock or impact loads. Heavy loads should be

scheduled to occur at moderate temperatures,

unless the type of steel in the crane is known to

have good low-temperature characteristics.

• If the groove of a sheave or drum fills with ice, it

could cause a rope to jump out of position, with

serious consequences.

• Freezing rain and snow accumulation on the

surface of the crane boom and jib increases the

loading due to both weight and extra surface

exposed to the wind. These have not been included

in load charts.

• Work should be deferred to more suitable weather

conditions when the ice deposits will have dropped

off or been removed from the machine. Note that

falling pieces of ice form a hazard themselves.


Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes
383

13.5 Overhauling Weights and Swivels

WARNING

Overhauling weights not meeting the requirements below

have resulted in accidents, personnel injuries and death.

a Overhauling weights are also known as headache

balls, downhaul weights or hook weights.

1 When overhauling weights are selected, the type

and location of swivels are factors that may affect

the life and breaking strength of the wire rope

used.

2 Overhauling weights used on the cable of a crane

or similar hoisting device shall:

• not be split

• be prevented from sliding up or down the cable

• be securely attached to the load hook and cable

b Swivels substantially isolate a load from torque in the

wire rope or system and reduce the hazard of a sling

spinning the overhauling weight as the load is taken

up or released.

• swivels use appropriate anti-friction bearings that

are designed to rotate freely under the maximum

rated load for which the swivel was designed.

• swivel hooks orientate the hook during rigging

operations. Hook swivels that use plain bearings

are designed to rotate only when the hook is not

loaded.

384
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

c A swivel is used on single part lines to isolate the

rotation of a load from Rotation Resistant Wire

Rope (RRWR) and to maintain the rope’s lay and

balance of inner and outer strand layers of RRWR.

d When load rotation is prevented by tag lines or

guides, swivels are not required on single part lines of

RRWR because the load prevents rotation of the wire

rope terminal end.

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


385

13.6 Planning Crane Lifts

a Crane lift planning requires an understanding of the

conditions affecting the following:

• choice of crane type

• knowledge of manufacturer’s load charts

• the steps involved to arrive at the net capacity of

the crane

b Crane capacities are based on the following:

• machine weight

• stability

• hydraulic pressure

• the strength of components

c The main factors which affect lifting of a load are as

follows:

• load weight, including load blocks, slings and

hardware

• shape of the load

• height to which the load is to be raised

• final position of the load when raised

• load ratio

• overhead obstructions

• limits of approach

• any other unique circumstance

386
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

d There is a difference between rated capacity, actual

strength of a crane and crane stability. The gross

capacity of the crane is shown on the manufacturer’s

load chart. The method of calculating net capacity

varies. Information on all Bruce Power cranes is

available from the Crane Crew and the RSE for

Cranes and Hoists.

1 On load charts, strength and stability refers to:

• Strength: When a structural component of a

crane will fail.

• Stability: A crane will tip over when overloaded.

2 Cranes shall not be operated “by the seat of the

pants” method to check for stability.

3 Cranes may fail structurally before tipping.

4 Cranes showing signs of tipping may already be

overloaded.

5 The following must be known:

• maximum load radius

• boom length and configuration required; boom

angle

• jib length and offset

• gross load

• parts of line required

• any specific limitations

• lifting capacity of boom-jib combinations

• lift from main boom

• lift from main boom with jib attached

• lift from jib


Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes
387

13.7 Planning Dual Lifts

a Crane capacities are based on freely suspended and

balanced loads. Dual lifts are complex and

potentially dangerous. The following factors shall be

considered when planning dual lifts:

1 All dual lifts shall be thoroughly planned, by a

qualified person, as an engineered lift.

2 A dual lift may be considered a critical lift,

depending on lift details.

3 A job plan including a rigging print, shall be

prepared.

4 The plan shall include the following:

• load calculation

• crane selection

• ground preparation

• crane hook up

• crane movements

• initial and final position

b Whenever possible, cranes of similar characteristics

should be used.

c Cranes and rigging shall have a capacity greater than

its calculated share of the load. For example, each

crane shall have at least a capacity of 100% of the

whole load at that radius.

d When a lifting beam is used on a dual lift:

1 Beams may be designed to share a load in

proportion to the cranes capacity (refer to

Figure 13-8 Dual Lift With Lifting Beam).


388
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

2 Beams shall remain level, in Figure 13-7 Tilted

Lifting Beam, as the beam tilts, the load shifts

toward one crane.

e If a lifting beam is not used in a dual lift, any

variation from level will throw additional weight

onto one of the cranes. Rigging shall not be attached

below C of G (refer to Figure 13-5 Dual Lift Without

Lifting Beam).

NOTE

For further information on dual lifts, the Construction

Safety Association’s “Mobile Crane Handbook” or

“Mobile Craning Today” from OETIO should be consulted.

Figure 13-5

Dual Lift Without Lifting Beam


Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes
389

Figure 13-6

Dual Lift With Lifting Beam

Figure 13-7

Tilted Lifting Beam

390
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

13.9 Warning Notices

a “Danger - Keep Clear - Swing Area” signs shall be

displayed on the exterior of the crane at all times.

b “Keep Clear - Working Near Live Apparatus” signs

shall be displayed on the exterior of the crane when

working near live lines or apparatus.

c A notice giving the following instructions shall be

placed in crane cabs:

1 Limits of approach to live apparatus.

2 The crane shall be grounded when working in the

vicinity of live apparatus.

3 The crane shall not be moved in the vicinity of live

apparatus without aid of a signaler.

d Counterweight rotation clearances shall be

maintained as follows:

1 A minimum two foot clearance shall be maintained

as a passageway between any solid or fixed object

and the counter-weight.

2 Where a two foot clearance cannot be maintained,

a passageway shall be roped off and posted with a

“No Passage” or “Swing Area” sign.

392
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

13.10 Soil Bearing Capacity

a Soil pressure in the SI metric system is expressed in

kilopascals, where a Pascal is a pressure of one

Newton per square metre. For practical rigging

purposes, mass per unit area in megagrams (metric

tonnes) per square metre is a more useful ratio and is

used in this handbook. All values are approximate.

b When a lift is made over the corner of a crane, the

maximum ground bearing pressure is exerted on the

corner outrigger, therefore larger outrigger pads may

be required.

c Conditions at the surface of the ground may not be

the same as below the surface.

d Table 13-1 Approximate Soil Bearing Values, may be

used as a guide to determine soil bearing values. If in

doubt, a lower value shall be used. Values from Table

13-1 may also be used to determine the size of

outrigger pads.

e If the water table is at or near the bearing surface in

granular soils, the load figures should be reduced by

50%.

CAUTION

Conditions may change unexpectedly. Frost may melt,

especially under outrigger pressure, thereby reducing

support. A few days of rain can drastically reduce soils

bearing values.

f If a crane remains in one place for an extended time,

outriggers shall be examined and reset if necessary.

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


393

Table 13-1

Approximate Soil Bearing Values

Material Tons per


Mg/m2 kPa

Sq. Ft.

1. Loose saturated sandy clay soils;


1 10 96

medium soft clay

2. Firm or stiff clay 1.5 15 140

3. Loose fine sand; medium compact sand;


1 10 96

inorganic silt soils

4. Compact sand-clay soils 3 30 290

5. Loose coarse to medium sand; medium


2 20 190

compact fine sand

6. Hard dry consolidated clay 5 50 480

7. Loose gravel and sandy gravel; very


5 50 480

compact sand and inorganic silt soils;

compact sand and gravelly sand

8. Soft rock 8 80 770

9. Compact gravel and boulder gravel


10 100 960

formations; very compact sandy gravel

10. Hard pan overlying rock 12 120 1150

11. Medium hard rock 40 390 3830

394
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

13.11 Crane Inspection

a Logbooks and inspection records shall be kept for

examination by the Ministry of Labour in accordance

with OHSA regulations. The periodic inspection of

cranes together with a suitable log book form a

permanent record of crane inspection, servicing,

replacement of components, and overhauls.

b Periodic and pre-use inspections shall be carried out

and logged before operating Mobile or Boom Truck

Cranes following Bruce Power instructions.

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


395

13.12 Rental and Contractor Cranes

13.12.1 Rental Crane

a It is preferable to rent a crane with an operator,

however, for a crane rental without an operator, the

following applies:

1 All provisions of this handbook shall apply as

though the crane was owned by Bruce Power.

Inspection and maintenance is the responsibility of

Bruce Power.

2 At the time of rental, following site procedures, the

supervisor responsible for the work shall obtain a

Safety Certificate from the owner certifying that

the equipment has been inspected and is

satisfactory for use at its rated load. The certificate

shall contain the same information as Bruce

Power’s inspection check sheet.

b For a crane rental with an operator, the following

applies:

1 For cranes rented with an operator, all provisions

of this handbook shall apply as though the crane

was owned by Bruce Power, except the

requirements for inspection and maintenance

which remains the responsibility of the crane

owner. Bruce Power, however must be satisfied that

the owner is aware of and is carrying out their

responsibilities.

2 At the time of rental, following site procedures, the

supervisor responsible for the work shall obtain a

Safety Certificate from the owner certifying that the

equipment has been inspected and is satisfactory for

use at its rated load. The certificate shall contain

the same information as a Bruce Power check sheet.


396
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

3 The supervisor has the right to reject a crane if it is

suspected to be defective. No Bruce Power

employee is expected to undertake a detailed

inspection of any supplier-owned or contractor-

owned crane, except as provided in Section 13.14.

4 During the course of the crane’s use, the Supervisor

of Lift shall:

• Be satisfied the crane is receiving regular

inspection and required maintenance.

• If not satisfied with the inspection and

maintenance of the crane, notify supervisor.

• If not satisfied that the crane is safe, or the

operator competent, stop the crane’s use and

notify supervisor.

13.12.2 Contractor’s Crane

a For cranes used by contractors or sub-contractors on

their own work, all provisions of Section 13.14 shall

apply.

b A Bruce Power representative shall be the Contract

Administrator or delegate. Requirements should be

written into the contract document and shall be

rigorously enforced.

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


397

13.14 Pre-Use Inspections And

Operational Checks For

Mobile Cranes

Refer to BP-PROC-00587, Inspection Requirements for

Rigging, Lifting and Material Handling Equipment, for

detailed inspection criteria.

a Prior to using a mobile crane, the crane operator

shall perform a pre-use inspection according to the

following list and make a crane log entry to record

the inspection and inspection results.

NOTE

All checks listed below may not pertain to the crane

being operated, operator shall check the manufacturer’s

manual for the type of crane.

1 Check the following:

• if there is a warning sign on the switch or engine

starting controls, do not operate the crane

• logbook

• crane Periodic Inspection date

• inspection date on crane fire extinguisher

• load chart (to stay within capacity)

• location and procedure for emergency shut down

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


399

2 Visually check the following: (where applicable)

• radiator coolant level

• engine oil level

• fuel level

• hydraulic oil level

• engine oil pressure

• engine coolant temperature

• battery charging amperage

• hydrostatic transmission temperature

• general condition of tires (proper inflation)

• HIAB mounting hoses, oil level and general defects

• crane for loose pins and physical damage

• condition of sheaves and load line retainers

• load line and hook for damage

• other usual circle checks for the vehicle

3 Test operate the following: (where applicable)

• warning lights

• parking brake

• hydrostatic transmission control switch

• accelerator

• power steering

• anti-two-block system

• backup alarm

• chassis for normal operation


400
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

4 Perform the following: (where applicable)

• ground vehicle if necessary

• set wheel chocks if required

• engage PTO and set RPM

• observe boom operation for normal power

and speed

• place warning signs or cones

• place blocking for outriggers

• extend and lower outriggers

• level vehicle and raise the tires clear of the

ground

b If problems are noted during the pre-use inspection

the operator shall enter details in the crane log and

notify the Supervisor of Lift.

c If a defect affects the safe operation of the crane the

operator shall remove the crane from service,

following site procedures, and hang a warning sign.

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


401

13.15 Mobile Crane Operation

a Crane operators shall observe practices outlined in

this section in conjunction with those listed in

Sections 3.0, Rigging and Lifting Practices and 4.0,

General Craning Considerations.

b No one shall be on or under the machine chassis of a

mobile crane at any time when the engine is running

or when the operator is at the controls.

c Operator shall perform the following:

• know the weight of the load

• fasten seat belt if supplied

• check swing area and overhead clearance

• check for overhead obstructions when travelling

the crane

• ensure the hook is secured when travelling the

crane without a load

• on “pick and carry” loads, secure the load with the

boom as low as possible

• ensure that it is safe to travel on floor gratings and

hatches

• with rear wheel steering, rear-end swing shall be

taken into account when cornering

• always set the emergency brake before leaving the cab

• ensure a minimum of three wraps of cable remain

on the drum. (Broderson recommends five wraps of

cable remain on the drum of some models)

• check manufacturers recommendations for crane

being used

• operate controls smoothly and gradually to avoid

abrupt, jerky movements of the load


402
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

d Operator shall observe the following restrictions:

• do not travel with the boom cylinder bottomed out

as damage may result

• never shift from forward to reverse without coming

to a complete stop

• do not travel a crane with a load unless it has a

“pick and carry” rating

• never leave the controls when the load is in the

raised position

• as the boom is extended, the hook block rises and

may jam at the boom head (this is known as two

blocking and shall be avoided)

Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes


403

13.16 Shut Down Procedure

To shut down a mobile crane, the operator shall follow

manufacturers’ recommendations and should perform the

following:

1 Remove the load.

2 Stow the boom.

3 Raise outriggers and pick up blocking.

4 If crane has been heavily worked, let the engine cool

off before shutting down.

5 Remove electrical grounds, if used.

6 Disengage the PTO.

7 Park in designated parking areas, clear of doorways

and fire routes.

8 Apply the parking brake.

9 Turn off fuel, if required.

404
Roa d Mobile, Rough Terrain and Crawler Cranes

14.0 Critical Hoisting Operations

14.1 Critical Lift Determination

14.2 Critical Lift Requirements and Planning

14.3 Pre-Lift Meeting

14.4 Critical Lift Performance

Critical Hoisting Operations


405

14.1 Critical Lift Determination

a The decision to designate a particular hoisting

operation as a critical lift shall be a line management

decision in keeping with the principles in

BP-PROC-00586, Control of Lifting Activities and

this handbook. The RSE may be consulted if required.

The work group supervisor who has responsibility for

the item to be lifted has the authority to designate the

lift be handled as a critical lift.

b A lift shall be designated as a critical lift if any of the

following conditions are met:

• lifts involving man baskets or other personnel lifts

• lifts where the load must be worked on while

suspended (this also requires an engineered lift)

• lifts that require the use of more than one hoist

(i.e. to drift a load)

• lifts that require a crane and attachment to a

structural support

• lifts that require 2 or more cranes

• lifts where the C of G is above the attachment

points

• engineered lifts (rigger skill level to be part of the

engineered lift assessment)

• lifts where a safety interlock must be bypassed (an

upper or lower limit for example)

• blind lifts or lifts where no radio communication is

possible or lifts involving more than one signaller

(if the second signaller is there for the sole purpose

of keeping the lift area clear, this is not sufficient

for a critical lift classification on its own)


406
Critical Hoisting Operations

• lifts where the object being lifted has a high

potential to get stuck leading to a “dead lift”

• lifts at 75% or more of the safe working load of

the crane or rigging, including overload tests

• lifts where the C of G could potentially change

(such as tanks or open vessels partially full of a

liquid or granular solid such as sand or salt)

• lifts where the load must be rotated vertically

• lifts where the sling angle of any sling is less than

45° or the total included angle of the rigging (any

two slings connected together) is less than 90° in

any plane

• lifts into or out of water (this does not include

repetitive fuel handling lifts of spent fuel performed

by fuel handling operators)

• lifts of an object more than twice the width of the

trolley or 25% of the span of the bridge in size

(large, potentially awkward objects that might be

difficult to control if the load started swinging)

• lifts of an object with a replacement value that

severely impact economics (i.e. with a replacement

value of more than $500,000 or a lead time of

greater than 12 months)

• lifts over energized equipment such as steam lines,

power lines, electrical switchgear, compressed

gasses or safety related equipment that may

become energized

• lifts of explosive, flammable or highly

contaminated/radioactive loads

Critical Hoisting Operations


407

• lifts where loss of control could lead to a Category

C spill or exposure to a controlled substance

• lifts of an object with no pre-engineered

attachment point and no logical choker location

• lifts that require the use of adjustable rigging for

the purpose of clearing obstructions (this does not

include lifts using adjustable rigging for the

purpose of balancing a load)

• lifts that involve verifying the weight or Centre of

Gravity of a load through a test lift

408
Critical Hoisting Operations

14.2 Critical Lift Requirements

and Planning

a Rigging plans for critical lifts not included in

maintenance procedures shall be documented. This shall

be a minimum of Form-12293, Safe Lift Form, plus an

Engineering Decision memo (EDM). Critical lift

documents should be prepared as soon as possible to

provide sufficient time for development, review and

approval.

b The First Line Manager shall ensure that only

competent and knowledgeable personnel who are

qualified to the appropriate level are assigned to critical

lifts. A least one rigger shall be a Master Rigger.

c The Supervisor of Lift shall ensure that a critical lift

plan or maintenance procedure is prepared that

defines the operation and includes the following:

1 Description of the lift and reason(s) for critical

designation.

2 Identification of the following:

• items to be moved

• load dimensions, and centre of gravity location

• total weight to be lifted including load blocks

and rigging equipment

• any hazardous or toxic materials that are present

3 Identification of hoisting equipment to be used by

type and rated capacity.

4 Rigging instructions and sketches that include the

following (as applicable):

• identification and rated capacity of all hardware,

slings and rigging accessories


Critical Hoisting Operations
409

• load-indicating devices

• lifting points

• sling angles and softeners

• boom and swing angles

• methods and location of attachment

• crane orientations

• other factors affecting equipment capacity

5 The load path shall be defined on Form-12293, Safe

Lift Form.

6 For mobile cranes, plan and elevation sketches

showing the intended load path, potential

obstructions and the location and clearance of the

crane and load.

7 Operating procedures and special instructions to

operators including rigging precautions and safety

measures to be followed as applicable.

d If required by the critical lift procedure, a practice lift

shall be done before the critical lift. Conditions for a

practice lift should closely simulate actual conditions

involving: weight, rigging selection and

configuration, load movement path, and other

relevant factors. Practice lifts should be done by the

same crew, using the same lifting equipment.

e Periodic inspection of rigging components used to

perform critical lifts should include non-destructive

evaluation.

f All lifting devices used in the lift shall be “in date” and

shall have a thorough examination before, during and

after the lift as per the instructions in this handbook.


410
Critical Hoisting Operations

14.3 Pre-Lift, Pre-Job Briefing Meeting

a The critical lift plan or maintenance procedure shall

be reviewed with all individuals engaged in the

hoisting operation at a pre-lift meeting led by the

First Line Manager/Supervisor of the Work Group

performing the lift.

b During the pre-lift meeting, line management shall

ensure the following:

1 All lift personnel are identified and their

responsibilities are clearly understood.

2 Job safety analysis and personnel qualifications are

reviewed.

3 All questions pertaining to the lift are resolved.

4 All involved in the lift shall sign Form-12293, Safe

Lift Form, to indicate agreement with the plan.

5 The EDM or other engineering documents (such as

calculations or drawings) shall be affixed to Form-

12293, Safe Lift Form.

6 Present the Lift Plan to the Shift Manager for

concurrence.

Critical Hoisting Operations


411

14.4 Critical Lift Performance

a Prior to the lift, the Supervisor of Lift shall perform

the following:

1 Control the lift to prevent inadvertent access to lift

area.

2 Appoint appropriate safety person(s) to perform

the following:

• escort the load

• keep the intended path of travel clear

• monitor the safe work area

3 Physically ensure evacuation of all effected lift

areas is complete.

4 If applicable, ensure all visual and audible alarms

are activated.

5 Ensure rigging has been inspected and installed

correctly.

6 Ensure an appropriate communication system is in

place and tested.

7 If applicable, have a site PA announcement made

regarding the lift location, areas to be avoided and

possible evacuation requirements.

412
Critical Hoisting Operations

b The Supervisor of Lift shall be present at the lift site

during the entire lifting operation and shall ensure

the following:

1 Signal person shall have no other duties while the

load is in the raised position.

2 The load is escorted by the safety person(s) to keep

intended path of travel clear of personnel and

obstructions.

c Upon completion of the critical lift, the Supervisor of

Lift shall ensure the following:

1 If applicable, a PA announcement is made to notify

staff that the lift has been completed.

2 Rigging is inspected for visible damage and signs of

over loading.

3 If rigging equipment has been damaged, it is

removed from service and an incident report shall

be filed.

4 The critical lift plan or maintenance procedure

shall be completed and filed.

Critical Hoisting Operations


413

414 Notes

Notes
415
416 Notes

© 2009 Bruce Power L.P.

Unpublished work, all rights reserved

CS•5552r1 Oct 09

You might also like